Voice Processing System
Installation Manual
Panasonic
a
n
a
s
o
n
ic
Model No.
KX-TVP200
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Voice Processing System, Model KX-TVP200.
Please read this manual before installing, customising, or operating the Voice Processing System.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Information
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
•
•
•
Follow all product warnings, cautions, and instructions.
Handle the unit carefully. Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock.
If the unit malfunctions, disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by
reconnecting the telephone. If the telephone operates properly, have the VPS repaired by
a qualified service technician.
•
•
•
Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way. Do not connect this unit
to an extension cord.
Keep the unit free of dust, moisture, condensation, high temperature exposure (more than
40 °C) and vibration. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight.
Mount the unit on a stable wall surface. Do not mount the VPS inside of a separate
enclosure unless it is properly ventilated.
•
•
Read all the information contained in this manual.
This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting. The proper
voltage and current required for this unit are listed on the product label.
•
•
This unit is equipped with a 3-wire earthing plug. The plug will only fit into a earth power
outlet. Do not modify this plug in any way. If it cannot be inserted into the outlet, have the
outlet replaced by a licensed electrician.
Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or
damaged, if the cabinet is cracked or broken, or when the unit has been exposed to
moisture, has been dropped, or is not otherwise operating properly.
•
•
•
Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning.
Do not block the vent slots and openings located on all sides of the unit.
Do not disassemble this product. Dangerous electrical shock could result. The unit must
only be disassembled and repaired by qualified service technicians.
•
•
Do not insert wires, pins, or any other material into the unit’s vent slots or access points.
This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction.
Do not install the unit near water or moisture, heating appliances, or electrical noise
generating devices such as televisions, monitors, fluorescent lamps, or electric motors.
•
•
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded outlets could result in fire and/or electrical shock.
Do not use solvents, liquid cleaners, water, or abrasive powders to clean this unit. Use only
a damp soft cloth for cleaning.
•
Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of
the leak.
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Installation Manual
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
For your future reference
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
DEALER’S TEL. NO.
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY
REASONS, THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING
CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO
REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAINS DISCONNECT DEVICE,
ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
4
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
Before you start setting or changing system parameters, we recommend that you turn off
the Answer Mode with the OFLN command. While off, the power LED of the VPS will flash
and the VPS will not answer any incoming call. After you finish programming, use the ONLN
command to turn on the Answer Mode (normal operation). Please see 7.2.1 Off-line Set
Trademarks
•
•
•
•
•
HyperTerminal is either a registered trademark or a trademark of HILGRAEVE,
INCORPORATED in the United States and/or other countries.
IBM is either a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Procomm Plus is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DATASTORM
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. in the United States and/or other countries.
Smartcom is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer
Products, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Installation Manual
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precaution
FORYOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING
TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and
convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of
5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is
obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR
HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE
CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING
THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green-and-Yellow :
Blue :
Brown :
Earth
Neutral
Live
As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the
coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol
GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
or coloured GREEN or
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
6
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to replace the fuse: Open the-fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse
and fuse cover.
Installation Manual
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
1.1
Why Voice Processing?.................................................................................. 14
Basic Operations............................................................................................. 14
VPS Limitations............................................................................................... 15
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND USE ................................ 16
System Administration .................................................................................... 16
System Management...................................................................................... 16
Subscriber Use ............................................................................................... 16
SYSTEM BASICS ................................................................................................ 17
General ........................................................................................................... 17
System Components....................................................................................... 17
Which Phone Systems are Compatible? ........................................................ 20
Installer Equipment and Software Requirements............................................ 21
Specifications.................................................................................................. 21
Hardware ........................................................................................................ 21
Expansion Capabilities.................................................................................... 22
Recommendations for System Configuration ................................................. 22
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION............................................................................... 24
General ........................................................................................................... 24
Connection Examples..................................................................................... 24
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
2.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................... 30
Installation....................................................................................................... 30
Wiring.............................................................................................................. 31
Environmental Requirements.......................................................................... 32
UNPACKING........................................................................................................ 33
MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL .................................................................... 34
FRAME EARTH CONNECTION .......................................................................... 36
INSTALLATION STEPS ...................................................................................... 37
General ........................................................................................................... 39
Installing the KX-TVP102 or KX-TVP204 Port Card ....................................... 39
CONNECTIONS................................................................................................... 43
Connecting to the PBX.................................................................................... 43
Opening the Ferrite Core ................................................................................ 43
Modular Plug Connection................................................................................ 43
Port Cards....................................................................................................... 44
TERMINAL CONNECTION.................................................................................. 46
Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal.................................... 46
Connecting the RS-232C Cable...................................................................... 46
RS-232C Signals ............................................................................................ 47
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE
3.1
GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION ..................................................................... 50
8
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
DPT or Inband Signalling?...............................................................................50
Why Integration is Important............................................................................50
How the VPS and the PBX Communicate.......................................................50
PBX Requirements for Integration...................................................................51
General Guidelines and Definitions.................................................................53
RS-232C Settings............................................................................................53
Port Settings....................................................................................................53
PBX Interface Parameters...............................................................................53
VPS Programming for Inband Integration........................................................57
KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Manager’s Extension.......................................................................................69
KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the
3.3.5
Operating and Maintenance Tool ....................................................................69
4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.3
GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION..............................................................76
Why DPT Integration is Important ...................................................................76
KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION ..............................78
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND
KX-TD612.............................................................................................................86
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Manager’s Extension......................................................................................86
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Operating and Maintenance Tool....................................................................91
Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming.........................................................96
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming .97
Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment via Station
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
Programming...................................................................................................97
Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming....................................98
TWT (Two-Way Transfer) Button Assignment via Station Programming ......100
Button Assignment via PC Programming ......................................................101
Live Call Screening Activation.......................................................................103
Live Call Screening Password Control ..........................................................103
TWR (Two-Way Recording) into Mailbox ......................................................104
TWT (Two-Way Transfer) into Mailbox..........................................................104
A Restriction on TWR/TWT Activation...........................................................104
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4.4.13
4.4.14
4.4.15
4.4.16
4.4.17
Installation Manual
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1
STARTING UP ................................................................................................... 106
Before Programming..................................................................................... 106
Quick Setup .................................................................................................. 106
Starting the Quick Setup............................................................................... 107
PORT SETTING OPTIONS................................................................................ 114
Custom Service Setting Example ................................................................. 114
Custom Service Features ............................................................................. 115
Custom Service Programming...................................................................... 116
Recording Menus.......................................................................................... 119
Checking Operation ...................................................................................... 120
Voice Mail ..................................................................................................... 120
Mailbox Groups............................................................................................. 120
Extension Groups ......................................................................................... 121
Interview Service........................................................................................... 121
Automated Attendant .................................................................................... 122
Department Dialing Service .......................................................................... 122
Operator Service........................................................................................... 123
SETTING PORTS............................................................................................... 124
Port Service Menu ........................................................................................ 124
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS ................................................... 126
Automated Attendant Menu .......................................................................... 126
Department Dialing ....................................................................................... 126
Operator’s Parameters ................................................................................. 127
SETTING MAILBOXES...................................................................................... 130
Mailbox Setting Menu ................................................................................... 130
Entering a Mailbox ........................................................................................ 130
Deleting a Mailbox ........................................................................................ 134
Password Reset............................................................................................ 134
Mailbox Listing ............................................................................................. 134
TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER ......................................................................... 136
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.6
6.1
MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998) ......................................... 138
Company Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,1)........................................................ 138
Custom Service Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,4).............................................. 139
SETTING UP MAILBOXES................................................................................ 141
Recording Personal Greetings...................................................................... 141
Recording the Owner’s Name....................................................................... 141
BACKING UP THE SYSTEM............................................................................. 143
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
INITIALISING THE SYSTEM ............................................................................. 146
UTILITY COMMANDS ....................................................................................... 148
Off-line Set (OFLN)....................................................................................... 149
On-line Set (ONLN)....................................................................................... 149
Set Password (PASS)................................................................................... 149
Set Time (TIME)............................................................................................ 150
Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET) ....................................................... 151
10
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2.6
7.2.7
7.2.8
7.2.9
7.2.10
7.2.11
7.2.12
7.2.13
7.2.14
7.2.15
7.2.16
7.2.17
7.2.18
7.2.19
7.2.20
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
7.3.10
7.3.11
7.3.12
7.4
Error Log Display (ELOG) .............................................................................151
Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD) ..........................................155
Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN).......................................................156
Program Version Display (VERS)..................................................................156
Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR) .....................................157
Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL).................................................158
Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL) ...................................................158
Modified Prompt List (MPLT).........................................................................158
Utility Command List (HELP).........................................................................159
Quick Setup (QSET)......................................................................................160
Circuit Condition Display (LMON)..................................................................160
Touchtone Information Display (PUTD).........................................................161
Wait for Caller ID (WCID) ..............................................................................162
SYSTEM REPORTS...........................................................................................163
Mailbox Assignments.....................................................................................163
COS (Class of Service) Assignments............................................................164
System Service Report..................................................................................165
Call Account Report.......................................................................................166
Port Usage Report.........................................................................................167
Port Usage Statistics Clear............................................................................167
Disk Usage Report ........................................................................................168
Disk Usage Statistics Clear ...........................................................................168
Mailbox Usage Report...................................................................................169
Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear......................................................................169
Fax Call Report..............................................................................................170
Fax Call Statistics Clear ................................................................................170
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...........................................................................172
SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................................................175
7.5
Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES
A1
SYSTEM FEATURES.........................................................................................178
Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B1
B2
B3
SYSTEM NAVIGATION......................................................................................206
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES ....................................................210
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS...................................................................................................216
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE .................................225
Port Assignment ............................................................................................225
Trunk Group Assignment...............................................................................227
Automated Attendant Parameters .................................................................230
Custom Service .............................................................................................237
Caller ID Call Routing Parameters ................................................................240
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS ................242
System Group Assignment............................................................................242
Time Group Service.......................................................................................244
Holiday Setting ..............................................................................................248
Daylight Saving Time (DST)..........................................................................250
B4
B4.1
B4.2
B5
B5.1
B5.2
B5.3
B6
B6.1
B6.2
B6.3
B6.4
Installation Manual
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6.5
B6.6
B6.7
B7
B7.1
B7.2
B7.3
Prompt Setting .............................................................................................. 251
System Caller Name Announcement............................................................ 252
Other Parameters ......................................................................................... 253
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS................................. 264
RS-232C Parameters.................................................................................... 264
Port Setting ................................................................................................... 265
PBX Interface Parameters ............................................................................ 265
Appendix C SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX...................................... 274
SETTING UP MAILBOXES................................................................................ 275
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS................................... 278
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK ...................................................................... 284
CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING................................................... 286
CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS) ...................................... 289
DELIVERING MESSAGES ................................................................................ 291
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX.................................. 293
LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES ......................................... 294
Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX .................................. 296
MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX ........................................ 297
SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION........................................ 299
CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX .............................. 302
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK ...................................................................... 304
RECORDING MESSAGES ................................................................................ 306
REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET ............................................................... 310
LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE............................. 312
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.................................................................... 314
INDEX ...............................................................................................373
12
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1.1 Why Voice Processing?
The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls. When a call comes in, it answers, forwards to
appropriate extensions, takes and stores messages, and notifies subscribers when messages
are left. Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system.
The VPS is easy to use, helping callers through the system with step-by-step voice prompts.
Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services, VPS messages are
confidential; they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber's password.
Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy, which are commonly lacking with
written messages. The messages come directly from the caller, in the caller's own voice. To
further ensure accuracy, the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before
saving them. Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient.
1.1.2 Basic Operations
Greeting Callers:
The VPS greets callers with a pre-recorded message that includes directions for leaving and
editing messages. The VPS can list single-digit numbers for each available extension or
mailbox. Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the
extension number at any time. Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a pre-programmed
destination (which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox) to leave a message.
Sending Messages:
Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailbox. Subscribers can send
messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once. The message sender can then
verify that the other subscriber has received the message.
Receiving Messages:
There are several different message notification methods that subscribers can use. They can
choose to be notified by message waiting lamp, beeper (pager), or a call from the system to
another line. System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time
a message is left (Subscribers can choose to receive message notifications differently
depending on the time of day.), Mailbox parameters, which accommodate 5-100 messages,
determine the maximum length of messages. If the system is connected using DPT Integration,
subscribers can press a pre-assigned button to record conversations into their own mailboxes
or other subscriber’s mailboxes while talking on the phone. DPT Integration also allows
subscribers to screen messages as they are being left, and intercept them if required.
14
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1.3 VPS Limitations
The VPS does not support:
UCD functions
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions;
when all extensions are unavailable, it returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy.
Calls can be forwarded by the VPS to the KX-TD500/1232/816 floating number of a UCD
group. The call then rings at the next available phone.
The VPS supports UCD functions with very limited capabilities. Because the incoming call
is forwarded as an intercom path and not a DIL (direct in line), the following items will not work:
•
•
•
•
time table
overflow function
DISA message from a DISA card
IRNA
Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the
VPS’ standard functions. We do not recommend these systems for integration with the VPS.
compatibility.
Installation Manual
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND USE
1.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION,
MANAGEMENT, AND USE
1.2.1 System Administration
System Administration is accomplished by the installer using terminal emulation software. It
concerns setting and changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems.
1.2.2 System Management
Two system functions are performed by the customer: System Management and Message
Management.
System Management concerns changing system parameters through the System Manager’s
Mailbox.
Message Management concerns recording voice prompts through the Message Manager’s
Mailbox. These messages include Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialling
menu, Custom Service menus, voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists, user prompts,
multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names.
1.2.3 Subscriber Use
System users are called subscribers. Subscribers are assigned personal mailboxes which they
can customise. Subscribers can record their names, record personal greetings, set covering
extensions, record questions for an interview mailbox, set the message reception mode, set
incomplete call handling status, set call transfer status, enter Personal Group Distribution Lists,
set the message waiting lamp, and set notification by calling.
16
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
1.3.1 General
The VPS is initially configured with approximately 32 h of storage, and can be expanded to
support 12 ports.
1.3.2 System Components
Main Cabinet
RS-232C
Connector
Earth Terminal
Fuse and fuse rating
AC Inlet
Panasonic
a
n
a
s
o
n
ic
Power Switch
Power Indicator
Note
EIA port is at SELV.
Inside View of the Main Cabinet
Earthing Strap
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Slots For
Optional Port
Cards
Rotary Switch
3.5 "Hard Disk
Drive
Ferrite Core
Power Indicator
POWER
Installation Manual
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
Note
Ports 1-12 are at TNV.
System Components
Power Indicator:
Indicates the system status: when flashing, the system is off-line (not ready to receive calls).
RS-232C Connector:
Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS that is necessary to program the system.
Earth Terminal:
Should be connected to an earth source with less than 1 resistance.
Fuse:
Protects the system from power line surges and should only be replaced with the same type.
Please see the fuse socket on the cabinet for the value of the fuse.
AC Inlet:
Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated to the VPS.
Power Switch:
Starts the system and begins the self-test.
SAFETY PRECAUTION: When making any connections or removing the cover, be sure
the power switch is switched off.
Earthing Strap:
Protects the printed circuit board from static electricity.
(Earth) SAFETY PRECAUTION: Discharge any body static by touching the metal bar.
Optional Port Cards:
The following types of port cards can be installed in the VPS.
•
•
Four digital port expansion cards (KX-TVP204)
Two digital/analogue port expansion cards (KX-TVP102)
KX-TVP102 consists of the following 2 cards:
•
•
Telephone line interface card
Digital processor (DSP) card
The telephone line interface transmits and receives analogue and digital signals to and from
the telephone line. The analogue input signal is digitised at a sampling rate of 8 kHz to
create a 16-bit digital signal.
The DSP has the following features:
•
•
•
•
Voice Compression and Decompression
Touchtone Detection
Touchtone Generation
Call Progress Tone Detection
KX-TVP204 consists of a telephone line interface and a DSP. The telephone interface of the
18
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
KX-TVP204 transmits and receives ONLY digital signals with a Panasonic KX-TD Digital PBX.
The DSP has the same features as the KX-TVP102.
MODE (Rotary Switch):
(Check the status of this switch only at start-up.) Provides the following additional functions:
Table 1-1
Position
Additional Function
Normal setting.
0
1
Initialises RS-232C parameters.
RS-232 default parameters: 9,600, N, 8, 1
2*
3*
Auto Configuration is automatically completed and
all ports are set for Automated Attendant service.
Auto Configuration is automatically completed and
all ports are set for Voice Mail service.
4
5
Reserved
Initialises the VPS. Clears all voice data (except
User 1 and User 2 prompts) and returns all system
parameters to the default setting.
6
7
8
Test Mode (Hard Disk Drive Read/Write Test)
Adjust VPS parameters to your PBX quickly.
Initialises the VPS. Clears all voice data and
returns all system parameters to the default
setting.
CAUTION: User 1 and User 2 Prompts will be
erased!
9
Reserved
* For Panasonic KX-TD series telephone systems with DPT Integration
To change the position, use an electrical or jewellers screwdriver etc.
When setting the Rotary Switch to any position (except 0):
1. Disconnect the extension wire(s) and wait a few minutes.
2. Turn the power switch off at the VPS.
3. Set the Rotary Switch.
4. Turn the power switch back on at the VPS.
5. Connect the extension wire(s) to the VPS and wait approximately 5 min.
6. Return the Rotary Switch to position 0.
Hard Disk Drive:
(One/system) Stores the proprietary system programme, the system administration table, the
voice prompts (about 50 min worth) and has the recording area for the messages from callers.
(The hard disk is controlled by the central micro processor.)
Installation Manual
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
Note: The actual Hard Disk Drive mounted on your VPS may look different from the one
shown in the corresponding illustration provided in the beginning of this section.
CPU Board:
(One/system) Main processing unit for the system. Comprised of central microprocessor,
ROM, dynamic RAM, system controller, Rotary Switch, and an RS-232C interface.
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible?
We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems:
•
•
•
•
•
Panasonic KX-TD500
Panasonic KX-TD1232
Panasonic KX-TD816
Panasonic KX-TA series
Panasonic KX-TD612
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
We cannot guarantee adequate integration of the VPS with other PBX systems or with
Key Systems. If the customer does not have a recommended Panasonic PBX system,
be sure that the system has the features listed below.
The PBX should have the following features for successful integration:
•
Single line (tip/ring) port circuits (Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this
connection.)
•
•
•
•
Extension to extension touchtone signalling
Message Waiting Notification from an SLT (single-line telephone)
Screened transfer from an SLT
Message Waiting Notification on proprietary (multi-line) sets (message waiting lamp
accessed by dialling on/off codes)
If the PBX does not have these features, VPS operation will be limited.
feature listed:
•
•
•
Description
Limitations of the system without the feature
Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature
VOICE MAIL
The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow-on ID and Inband Integration. When
callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail, Follow-on ID sends
callers directly to the mailbox. Without Follow-on ID, the caller would have to re-enter the
mailbox number when connected to Voice Mail.
Touchtone Integration enables the VPS to recognise the current state of the call and improve
its call handling performance. When enabled, the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) by sending a code with touchtones before sending the normal
20
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
call progress tones. For example, when a caller hangs up before making a selection, the PBX
sends # 9 to the VPS port that answered. This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up.
Upon receiving these digits, the VPS goes on-hook and is ready to handle another call.
DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX-TD series PBX
(depending on the software version). This DPT Integration provides the VPS with more
information than Touchtone Integration. This information enables the system to identify the
extension number of the caller, know where from and why the call is forwarded, and recognise
what the caller wants to do. Some features are available only with DPT Integration (Remote
Call Forwarding Set, Live Call Screening, Two-Way Recording, Two-Way Transfer, Direct
Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging, Auto Configuration, Caller Name Announcement (system/
personal), Caller ID Call Routing, Personal Greeting for Caller ID, Time Synchronisation with
PBX).
1.3.4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements
The installer must have a personal computer or data terminal equipped with terminal
emulation software. We suggest that you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE.
Use the personal computer to program the VPS. Terminal emulation software enables the
keyboard to be used as a data entry device.
While both the personal computer and data terminal are working, the personal computer allows
screens to be saved in a file throughout the process. It is often helpful to retrieve these files
later if technical support is needed.
1.3.5 Specifications
Table 1-2
Compression Rate: 32 kbps
Ports (maximum): 12 ports
Voice Storage (approximate): 32 h
Custom Services: 100
Message Retention: 1 to 30 days or unlimited
Number of Mailboxes: 1022 Subscriber and 2 Manager Mailboxes
Number of Messages per Mailbox: 100 maximum (programmable)
1.3.6 Hardware
•
•
•
•
One Hard Disk Drive
Three Optional Port Card Slots for KX-TVP102 and/or KX-TVP204 Cards
One RS-232C Connector
One Rotary Switch
Installation Manual
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
1.3.7 Expansion Capabilities
Expansion requires additional port card(s): KX-TVP102 or KX-TVP204.
•
The KX-TVP102 card has 2 digital/analogue ports, and the ports are increased in
increments of 2.
•
The KX-TVP204 card has 4 digital ports, and the ports are increased in increments of 4.
1.3.8 Recommendations for System Configuration
General guideline: a ratio of 6/1 (for every 6 lines, 1 port). There are 2 questions to ask when
considering how many ports are desirable:
•
•
Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded/transferred calls?
If they are answering incoming calls, how busy are the lines?
The guideline above (6/1) usually works well with moderate traffic. However, this may have to
be modified for heavy traffic. Recommendations are outlined in the following charts.
PBX
Outside (CO) Lines
1-6
VPS
Port
1
7-12
2
13-18
3
19-24
4
25-30
5
31-36
6
37-42
7
43-48
8
49-54
9
55-60
61-66
67-72
10
11
12
One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 outside (CO) lines. The
preceding recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy
traffic.
22
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
PBX
Outside (CO) Lines
1-4
VPS
Port
1
5-8
2
9-12
3
13-16
4
17-20
5
21-24
6
25-28
7
29-32
8
33-36
9
37-40
41-44
45-48
10
11
12
Installation Manual
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
1.4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
1.4.1 General
DPT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-TD digital PBX, the VPS ports look like digital extensions. The PBX
thinks that the VPS is a digital phone, and the VPS mimics all actions of a digital set. Another
advantage of DPT Integration is that the 2B+D communication provides 2 VPS ports for each
Digital Extension port. Communication between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration
requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire connections for each port. To
communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration, the PBX and VPS must
be programmed to work together.
DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a KX-TD digital PBX with the proper
software level.
Note
To use DPT Integration, the lowest numbered jack of the VPS must be connected to
the lowest numbered jack assigned as a Voice Mail Port in the KX-TD. See the DPT
Connect the other jacks to the VPS in the order of Voice Mail Port Assignment in the
PBX.
Inband/None Integration
To the PBX, the VPS looks like SLT sets through standard single-line (tip/ring) telephone
interfaces.
1.4.2 Connection Examples
DPT Integration
For example, when you mount 3 KX-TVP204 cards, you can use 12 VPS ports in total by
connecting 6 jacks of the KX-TD series PBX to 6 jacks of the VPS.
24
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Connection Example (KX-TVP204 3)
PBX (KX-TD1232)
VPS
Jack 6
Jack 5
Jack 6
SLOT 3
Port 9 Port 10 Port 11 Port 12
Jack 5
Jack 4
Jack 3
Jack 3
Jack 4
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8
Jack 2
Jack 1
Jack 1
Jack 2
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
Assigned as DPT VPS ports
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
The lowest numbered
jack on the slot.
Installation Manual
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Connection Example (KX-TVP102 3, DPT Integration Mode)
PBX (KX-TD1232)
VPS
Jack 5
Jack 6
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Jack 3
Port 9 Port 10
Jack 3
Jack 4
Jack 2
Jack 2
Port 5 Port 6
Jack 1
Jack 1
Port 1 Port 2
Assigned as DPT VPS ports
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
The lowest numbered
jack on the slot.
Connect the odd-numbered jack on each KX-TVP102 card to your PBX (see the diagram
above). The VPS will support 2 ports for each KX-TVP102 card, with only one jack connected.
Note
Do not connect the even-numbered jacks on the KX-TVP102 card.
26
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Inband/None Integration
Connection Example (KX-TVP102 3, Inband/None Integration Mode)
PBX (KX-TD1232)
VPS
Jack 6
Jack 5
Jack 5
Port 9
Jack 6
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
Port 10
Jack 4
Jack 3
Jack 3
Port 5
Jack 4
Port 6
Jack 2
Jack 1
Jack 1
Port 1
Jack 2
Port 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
The lowest numbered
jack on the slot.
Connect both jacks on each KX-TVP102 card to your PBX (see the diagram above). The VPS
will support 2 ports for each KX-TVP102 card, with both jacks connected.
Installation Manual
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
28
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS.
2.1.1 Installation
The VPS needs to be mounted on a wall. Improper placement of the system may result in
malfunction, noise, or discolouration. Avoid installing the VPS in the following places:
•
•
in direct sunlight; in hot, cold, or humid places
in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. (where sulphuric gas may damage the
equipment or contacts).
•
•
•
where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit.
near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines, elevators or electric
welders.
•
on or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment; near microwave ovens or air
conditioners. (Ideally, the VPS should not be in the room with these items and should be
at least 1.8 m away from televisions.)
Do not obstruct the areas around the PBX and the VPS. Both require space above for
cooling and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection.
30
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1.2 Wiring
•
Do not wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source, computer, etc. If cables
are run near those wires, shield them with metal tubing or use shielded cables and earth
the shields.
•
•
Use protectors if running cables on the floor. Avoid running cables under carpets.
Avoid sharing a 110 V-240 V AC power supply for computers, telexes, and other office
equipment with the VPS. Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS
operation.
When making any connections or removing the cover, be sure the power switch is
turned off.
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
•
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
•
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
•
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Note
If you live in an area that can have frequent power failures, we strongly recommend
that you purchase a suitable UPS (uninterruptible power supply) for your VPS (and
PBX if needed). The power rating of your VPS may be found in the specifications.
Installation Manual
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1.3 Environmental Requirements
The hard disk is sensitive to cold, heat, dryness, humidity, shock, vibration, and magnetic
fields. Please observe the conditions specified below.
Table 2-1 Hard Disk Drive Usage Environment
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Shock
: 5 °C to 40 °C
: See Graph 1 below.
: Under 5 G
Vibration
: 5 Hz to 22 Hz : 0.0042 cm displacement; double
amplitude,
1 octave per minute.
23 Hz to 350 Hz : Under 0.5 G
Magnetic Field
: DC : 0.6 mT
µ
to 700 kHz : 0.7
T
µ
700 kHz to 1.5 MHz : 3
T
Graph 1: Allowable Relative Humidity vs. Temperature
Relative Humidity (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
Operating Area
40
30
20
10
0
5
15
25
35
45
55 (˚C)
Temperature
32
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL
The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS. If
screws other than the ones supplied are used, use the same-sized diameter screws as the
enclosed ones.
Mounting on a Wooden Wall:
1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
Template
2. Install the 3 screws (included accessories) into the wall.
Wooden
Wall
Drive the screw
to this position.
3. Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar Wall:
1. Place the template on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
34
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL
Template
2. Drill 3 holes and drive the rawlplugs (user-supplied) with a hammer, flush to the wall.
Concrete or
Mortar Wall
To the wall surface
Rawlplug
6.4 mm
29 mm
3. Install the 3 screws (included accessories) into the rawlplugs.
Drive the screw
to this position.
4. Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Installation Manual
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION
2.4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION
IMPORTANT!!!
Connect the frame of the main unit to the earth.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert the earthing wire.
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the earthing wire to the earth.
To earth
Panasonic
a
n
a
s
o
n
ic
36
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS
The following is an overview of the standard installation process using DPT Integration. When
necessary, other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed descriptions
or instructions.
1. Obtain a list of current users, their extension numbers, their departments, and the type of
systems they use (mailbox, no mailbox, beeper [pager], car phone, etc.).
2. Assess your customers’ needs before setting up the system. You will save yourself time
later by giving customers what they need up front. Ask the office manager how the VPS will
be used. Give examples.
Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings. You will find
these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes down
the road.
3. Connect the power cord to the VPS, then turn the power switch on.
CAUTION
The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the
socket-outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
5. Standard Initialisation (For DPT Integration Connection)
Program the KX-TD500, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TD816 or the KX-TD612 for Voice
Mail integration.
•
KX-TD500, KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TD612
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
Programming may be performed on-site or at the office.
All memory is stored and will be retained when the unit is powered up as long
as the Rotary Switch has been reset to position [0] prior to turning the unit off.
b) Turn the power switch off at the VPS.
e) Set the Rotary Switch to position 5.
f) Turn the power switch back on at the VPS.
g) Wait until the "warning" appears on the screen.
h) Set the Rotary Switch back to position 0.
Installation Manual
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS
CAUTION
If the Rotary Switch is not reset to position 0 after initialisation, all programming
will be lost when the voice processor loses power!
7. Check Quick Setup:
•
•
The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid.
The screen output should be: [On Line].
If you do not see the "On Line" message, check the following:
•
•
The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors.
The programming on the KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 or KX-TD612 is correctly set in
System Programme [126].
•
The programming on the KX-TD500 is correctly set in the 1-4 VPS (DPT) Port
Assignment screen.
8. Set up Class of Service (COS) for each user. Customise voice prompts if necessary (see
9. Perform Administrative Programming through a personal computer (see Appendix B
CAUTION
Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause malfunction.
To turn the power off after installing the VPS, unplug the power cord from the VPS a
few minutes after disconnecting all extension wire(s).
38
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS: KX-TVP102 OR KX-TVP204
2.6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS:
KX-TVP102 OR KX-TVP204
2.6.1 General
Port Expansion Cards
•
One KX-TVP102 card can support 2 VPS ports, under either Inband or DPT Integration.
•
One KX-TVP204 card can support 4 VPS ports, under DPT Integration.
Expansion Capabilities of the VPS
The VPS can handle up to 12 ports simultaneously when 3 KX-TVP204 port cards are
installed.
The VPS has no port expansion card installed at the factory—the cards must be purchased
separately.
CAUTION
Before installing an optional port card, it is very important that the power to the unit
be turned off. Before beginning the actual installation and touching the card or any
circuitry within the unit, discharge any static electricity from your body by touching
the earthing strap. This is a critical step that must be performed to protect the printed
circuit board and any other electronic components from static electricity. Refer to
the manual accompanying the optional card concerning the precautions that must
be taken and the steps for completing the installation.
2.6.2 Installing the KX-TVP102 or KX-TVP204 Port Card
1. Remove the adhesive tape from the card.
KX-TVP102 Card
KX-TVP204 Card
Installation Manual
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS: KX-TVP102 OR KX-TVP204
2. (KX-TVP102 only) Loosen, remove and discard the screw under the tape with a
screwdriver.
3. Loosen two screws on the right side of the main unit, then open the front cover in the
A
direction of arrow
.
A
Panasonic
a
n
a
s
o
n
ic
4. Loosen the screw on the earthing strap, then remove the strap from the unit.
T
3
2
SLO
T
SLO
T
1
SLO
40
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS: KX-TVP102 OR KX-TVP204
5. Insert the optional port card into SLOT 1 using the guide rails.
KX-TVP102 Card
SLOT
SLOT
3
2
SLOT
1
Guide Rails
KX-TVP204 Card
3
T
O
L
S
2
T
O
L
S
1
T
O
L
S
Guide Rails
6. Press the latches at both ends of the card firmly, then fix the earthing strap to the unit with
a screwdriver.
KX-TVP102 Card
Latches
Press
3
T
LO
S
Latch
T 2
LO
S
Card
T 1
SLO
Installation Manual
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS: KX-TVP102 OR KX-TVP204
KX-TVP204 Card
Latches
Press
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Latch
Card
42
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 CONNECTIONS
2.7 CONNECTIONS
2.7.1 Connecting to the PBX
One jack of the VPS can be connected to 1 jack of the PBX. Use a 4-conductor cable for
connection with KX-TD systems that use DPT Integration. Use a 2-conductor (T and R) cable
for connection to all other PBXs.
4-Conductor Cable
Y
Y
G
G
R
R
B
B
Modular Connection
B: BLACK
R: RED
G: GREEN
Y: YELLOW
Outer Pins
Inner Pins
RJ11
Terminal wire
BT431 or BT631
L
T
R
H
5
4
3
2
2.7.2 Opening the Ferrite Core
Insert your finger into the opening of the ferrite core and open it as shown below:
2.7.3 Modular Plug Connection
Insert the modular plug of the telephone cord into the modular jack on the port card. Guide the
telephone cord through the ferrite core. Close the ferrite core.
Installation Manual
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 CONNECTIONS
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
POWER
2.7.4 Port Cards
There are 2 types of port expansion cards (see 2.6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS:
•
•
Four Digital ports expansion card (KX-TVP204)
Two Digital/Analogue ports expansion card (KX-TVP102)
One KX-TVP204 card (2 jacks) can support 4 VPS ports using the DPT Integration mode. The
KX-TVP204 card does not function with any other integration mode (Inband Integration, None).
One KX-TVP102 (2 jacks) can support 2 VPS ports under either Inband or DPT Integration.
Table 2-3 The Number of Ports VPS Cards Can Support
Card Type
Integration Mode
DPT
Inband/None
Not available
2
KX-TVP204
KX-TVP102
4
2
Note
Only 1 integration mode among DPT, Inband and None can be used at a time.
Expansion Capabilities
There are 3 SLOTs available in the VPS. Four VPS ports are assigned to each SLOT. The VPS
can support a maximum of 12 VPS ports.
When using a KX-TVP102 card, only the first 2 ports of the 4 available ports can be used. For
example, when you mount the KX-TVP204 in SLOT 1, the VPS supports ports 1-4. When the
KX-TVP102 is installed in SLOT 1, the VPS is only able to support ports 1 and 2. When
installing, ensure that the proper number of VPS ports have been set up and correspond to the
port parameters established by the System Administrator.
examples, and the available number of ports in each case.
44
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 CONNECTIONS
Table 2-4 Card Configuration Examples (DPT Integration)
Pattern No.
SLOT 3
(Port 9-12)
SLOT 2
(Port 5-8)
SLOT 1
(Port 1-4)
Total Number
of Ports
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TVP204
(Port 9-12)
TVP204
(Port 5-8)
TVP204
(Port 1-4)
12
TVP102
(Port 9, 10)
TVP102
(Port 5, 6)
TVP102
(Port 1, 2)
6
TVP102
(Port 5, 6)
TVP204
(Port 1-4)
6
TVP102
(Port 9, 10)
TVP102
(Port 5, 6)
TVP204
(Port 1-4)
8
TVP102
(Port 1, 2)
2
TVP102
(Port 5, 6)
TVP102
(Port 1, 2)
4
TVP204
(Port 1-4)
4
TVP204
(Port 5-8)
TVP204
(Port 1-4)
8
TVP204
TVP204
TVP102
10
(Port 9-12)
(Port 5-8)
(Port 1, 2)
Installation Manual
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.8 TERMINAL CONNECTION
2.8 TERMINAL CONNECTION
2.8.1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal
The programming terminal must be connected with a serial cable with an RS-232C connector
at the RS-232C port. This must be a null modem cable. This enables system administration
(system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis) to be performed.
Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory:
Table 2-5
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Baud Rate:
9600 bps
8 Bits
None
Word Bit Length:
Parity:
Stop Bit Length:
1 Bit
2.8.2 Connecting the RS-232C Cable
RECOMMENDED:
Before connecting the cable, switch off the power on both the data terminal and the
VPS.
RS-232C Cable
Data Terminal
Or Printer
Panasonic
RS-232C port
Insert the RS-232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction.
The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m.
46
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.8 TERMINAL CONNECTION
®
Standard IBM 25-Pin Connection
Circuit Type
(RS-232C)
Signal
Name
Signal
Name
Circuit Type
(RS-232C)
Pin No.
Pin No.
AA
FG
1
2
3
1
3
FG
AA
BB
BA
CD
AB
CB
CC
CF
BA
BB
TXD
RXD
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
CTS
DSR
DCD
2
20
7
AB
CD
SG
7
DTR
20
5
6
8
Table 2-6 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Pin
Circuit Type
Signal Name
Number
RS-232C
CCITT
1
2
FG
Frame Ground
AA
BA
101
103
TXD
Transmitted Data
3
4
RXD
RTS
Received Data
BB
CA
104
105
Request To Send
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
CC
107
7
8
SG
Signal Ground
AB
CF
102
109
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
CD
108.2
2.8.3 RS-232C Signals
Frame Ground (FG)
Connects an external ground to the unit frame, usually the earth pin of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data (TXD)— output
Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal/printer. A "mark" condition is held unless data or
BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data (RXD)— input
Conveys signals from the terminal/printer to the unit.
Request To Send (RTS)— output
This lead is held on whenever DSR is on.
Signal Ground (SG)
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Installation Manual
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.8 TERMINAL CONNECTION
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)— output
This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that the RS-232C is on-line. Circuit DTR ON
does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal/printer. It is
switched off when the RS-232C is off-line.
48
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1.1 DPT or Inband Signalling?
There are 2 types of integration available on the VPS: Inband Signalling and DPT. The VPS
used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment.
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may
not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration (see
4.1.1 Why DPT Integration is Important). For more information, consult your dealer.
3.1.2 Why Integration is Important
The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard
single-line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the VPS operation depends on the
capabilities and features provided by the PBX; its performance will vary when connected with
different PBX systems. For example, Follow-on (or Called Party) ID is a feature of the PBX. If
the PBX does not have this feature, the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct mailbox
and play the Busy or No Answer greeting for that mailbox.
3.1.3 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate
To the PBX, the VPS looks like an SLT. The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT, and the VPS
mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT.
For the VPS and the PBX to communicate, proper signalling is important. Like an attendant,
the VPS places calls by going off-hook and dialling numbers. It starts call transfers with a flash
(recall) to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number. By recognising call progress
tones from the PBX, the VPS decides how calls should be handled. Inband Integration allows
the PBX to send certain digits (touchtone) to the VPS, allowing it to recognise the status of the
extension and take the appropriate action.
Table 3-1
VPS/PBX COMMUNICATION
PBX to VPS
Call Progress Tones
VPS to PBX
SLT Signals
•
•
•
ringback
busy
•
•
•
on/off hook
flash (recall)
touchtones
reorder
Touchtones
The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features. For example, if the VPS takes a
message, one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialling the PBX’s Message-Waiting-
Lamp-On code. Once new messages are retrieved, the VPS dials the Message-Waiting-Lamp-
Off code for that same mailbox owner.
50
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration
The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS. (Although this
section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX, it may be necessary to refer to the PBX’s
documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions.)
Single Line (Tip/Ring) Port Circuits
The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLTs. Some PBXs need an OPX card
to provide this connection. However, some OPX cards do not provide all the capabilities
listed in this section.
Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply:
Table 3-2
Minimum Loop Current
Minimum Line Voltage
Minimum Ringing Voltage
20 mA
7 V DC
40 V AC
Extension to extension Touchtone Signalling
For system users to access VPS services and features, they must be able to send touchtones
from their telephones to the VPS port. As a general rule, SLTs can perform extension-to-
extension touchtone signalling; however, many proprietary telephones cannot. Some PBXs
need to be programmed to make proprietary telephones use touchtone signalling.
If the PBX does not provide extension-to-extension touchtone signalling, VPS services
and features will be limited.
TEST:Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question. When the call
is answered, see if the person receiving the call hears touchtones when
numbers are dialled.
Message Waiting Notification from an SLT
The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive broken dial tone when the Message-
Waiting-Lamp-On code is dialled by the VPS. The VPS functions best when the extension
number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light-On or Light-Off code. On some PBXs,
however, the extension number is dialled first, followed by a flash (recall) and then the On
code. This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the flash
(recall) signal.
If the PBX does not provide message waiting notification from an SLT, the VPS can only
notify mailbox owners by dialling a beeper (pager) or user-assigned extension number.
This process slows down VPS performance as it dials the beeper (pager) or extension number
and waits to confirm notification. The beeper (pager) or user-assigned extension notification is
meant to be used for necessity, usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office (e.g.,
Installation Manual
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
sales people or field representatives). The only other option, without message waiting
notification, is for mailbox owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages.
TEST: See if dialling the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension’s
message waiting indicator.
Screened Transfer from an SLT
The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly.
A screened transfer:
1. Puts the caller on hold, usually with a flash (recall).
2. Dials the extension.
3. Checks to see if the called subscriber is in, out, or on another line, and whether or not that
subscriber accepts the transfer.
4. Completes the transfer (by going on-hook) or returns to the caller to say that the party is
busy or not available. It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message.
If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT, the VPS cannot give callers the
option to leave a message in a subscriber’s mailbox.
TEST: Place an outside call from an SLT. See if you can set up a screened
transfer to another extension. Next, try the same test with an internal call.
(The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls.)
Follow-on ID or Called Party ID
When forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS, a PBX with Follow-on ID sends the mailbox
number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller. The VPS responds
by playing that subscriber’s personal greeting. This operation is sometimes called Call Forward
to Mailbox. Without this feature, the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when the line
is busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message.
52
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2.1 General Guidelines and Definitions
Optimal performance of the VPS/PBX system relies on proper VPS programming. There are 3
categories of hardware settings: RS-232C, Port Settings, and PBX Interface Parameters.
Entering a number sets some of the parameters, while others use sequence codes.
3.2.2 RS-232C Settings
•
Baud Rate (300-38400): Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits-per-
second.
•
•
•
•
Word Bit Length (7-8): Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
Parity (N, O, E): Specifies the parity used for error detection.
Stop Bit Length (1-2): Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte.
Default: 9600, 8, N, 1
3.2.3 Port Settings
There is no need to change these in a typical installation. Only change these parameters
when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Each port on the VPS
should match the type of signalling the PBX expects. If you need to change these settings,
refer to the PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings.
•
Flash (Recall) Time—100 ms, 300 ms, 600 ms, 900 ms:
The minimum length of time that the PBX requires to recognise a flash (recall) signal.
Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX’s setting.
•
CPC Signal (Calling Party Control Signal)—NONE, 6.5 ms, 150 ms, 300 ms, 450
ms, 600 ms:
The length of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate that
the caller has hung up; usually set to NONE, since most PBXs do not provide this signal
to single line ports. If choosing a setting other than NONE, use an amount equal to or
less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal.
•
•
Disconnect Time—1 s-8 s:
The length of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended.
Dial Mode—Touchtone, Pulse 10 pps, Pulse 20 pps:
The type of signalling the PBX single line port expects to receive (pps = pulses per
second).
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters
Dialing Parameters
•
PBX Type:
Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS.
Installation Manual
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
•
Integration Mode:
Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX. DPT Integration
is only available when a KX-TD series PBX is connected and the software is upgraded.
Table 3-3
SEQUENCE CODES
D
F
Disconnect
Flash (Recall)
Ring Detection
Silence Detection
Dial Tone Detection
Wait for 1 Second
Dial Extension
Answer
R
S
T
W
X
A:
Touchtone Digits
0-9, , #
•
•
•
Operator Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator.
Example: FTX [flash (recall)—dial tone—dial (operator) extn.]
Extension Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension.
Example: FTX [flash (recall)—dial tone—dial extn.]
Alternate Extension (Transfer Sequence):
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that belongs to the "Alternate Extension
Group". This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure (i.e., blind
transfer) such as modem extensions.
Example: FTXD [flash (recall)—dial tone—dial extn.—hang up]
•
•
•
Reconnect Sequence on Busy:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension is busy. PBXs differ in how
they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Reconnect Sequence on No Answer:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension does not answer. PBXs differ
in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension’s owner has enabled Call
Screening to not take the call. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an
SLT to determine the sequence.
•
•
•
Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at
an extension.
Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at
an extension.
Call Waiting Sequence:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the called extension
54
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
is busy. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the
sequence.
•
Release Sequence for Call Waiting:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting. PBXs differ in how they
handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Inband Signalling
These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband. If the PBX type is set
to a KX-T series system, these parameters will be automatically set. If another type PBX is
used, check that system’s installation manual for settings.
Table 3-4
Code
(default)
Call State
Sent to the Voice Mail Port When...
The extension dialled is ringing.
1
2
Ringback Tone
Busy Tone
The extension dialled is busy.
Reorder Tone
An invalid extension number is dialled or the call is
inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port (also
heard when no touchtone receiver is available to the Voice
Mail extension).
3
4
5
DND
The extension dialled has set DND (Do Not Disturb).
The extension dialled is answered.
Answer
Forwarded to
Voice Mail
(Ringing)
The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and
another Voice Mail port is able to answer. (This lets the first
Voice Mail port, usually an Auto Attendant, send the call to
the other Voice Mail port.)
6
7
Forwarded to
The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and no
Voice Mail (Busy) other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call. (This
signals the Voice Mail port [usually Auto-Attendant] to let the
caller to leave a message.)
Forwarded to Extn. The extension dialled is forwarded to another non-Voice
Mail extension.
8
9
Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp
Off code is dialled successfully.
Disconnect
The caller disconnects. The telephone company must send
a CPC signal to the PBX for this feature to work on outside
calls.
#9
Digit Translation Table Parameters
These parameters allow PBXs that have a fixed Follow-on ID sequence to be used with the
VPS. For example, a Follow-on ID sequence of [
these parameters.
201] can be changed to [#6201] by using
•
Inter-Digit Time-Out: This parameter defines the duration of incoming signals (Follow-
on ID) from the PBX to the VPS. The Digit Translation Table is applied to the digits
received within this time.
Installation Manual
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
•
Input-Output (up to 8 alphanumeric characters): When the system receives digits
within the inter-digit time, it checks them against the input table. If they are found, the
system utilises the output digits in their place.
The remainder of this section consists of step-by-step guides for software verification
and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems.
If you have any problem as you go through this section, please consult your dealer.
56
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.1 VPS Programming for Inband Integration
Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal. The table below lists recommended
parameters for Panasonic KX-T series PBXs.
Table 3-5
Other
Manufacturers
T1232/
TA series
TD816/
1232/612
PBX Type
T308 T616
T96
T336
TD500
Integration Mode
None
Inband
FX (A)
Inband Inband
None
Inband
FTX (A)
Inband Inband Inband
Inband
OperatorTransfer
Sequence
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
Sequence
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW
FWW
FWW
*
FWW FWW
FWW FWW
FWW FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW FWW
FWW FWW
FWW FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
T701X
FWW
FWW
FWW
T701X
Reconnect
Sequence on No-
Answer
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
Light-On
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
T701X# T#91X
T 9X
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
Light-Off
*
T702X# T#90X T#9X
T700X
T700X
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
Call Waiting
Sequence
*
*
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
F
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
F
2
F
Release
Sequence for Call
Waiting
Installation Manual
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
*
Check with manufacturer.
N/A
(A)
Not Available
Adding "A" for "answer" to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message:
"You have a call" when the AA transfers a call. The VPS disconnects when the call is
answered. Adding "D" for "disconnect" creates a blind transfer.
Note
The UK version KX-T1232 does not support Inband Integration.
3.3.2 KX-TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via
the Manager’s Extension
1. Enable System Programme [102] for each extension connected to the VPS. Jack 07, or
jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS as the Voice Mail port.
This parameter is used to tell the KX-TA series which extensions are connected to the VPS.
Ports with this parameter enabled can send Follow-on ID and touchtone call status
Signalling (busy, answered, disconnect, etc.) if the Voice Mail integration and Touchtone
Integration features are also enabled.
2. Enable System Programme [103] to turn on Touchtone Integration. On extensions with the
Voice Mail port parameter enabled, the KX-TA series can send codes (touchtones) to
indicate call states; this increases VPS efficiency. Codes apply to all transferred calls;
outside calls only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-TA series is programmed for CPC
Detection, and the Telephone Company sends the CPC signal). Refer to the Table 3-3
3. Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Programme
[600].
Reserve this extension group for these extensions! Do not mix other extensions into
this group.
4. Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Programme [100].
5. Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Programme
[101].
6. At every VPS extension, temporarily connect an SLT or butt set, go off-hook and dial 7301#
to turn on Data Line Security. This prevents the KX-TA series from sending Executive
Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions. We recommend that all Voice Mail port
extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording.
7. Select the appropriate outside (CO) line feature settings depending on how your customer
plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup, or C) to
only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended outside (CO) line feature settings:
58
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programmes [414] (Day Mode), [415]
(Night Mode), [416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to the
first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA series will allow incoming
outside calls to hunt only if the outside (CO) lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt
group. Lines programmed as "Normal" do not hunt.
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programmes [408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to
enable ringing at the operator’s extension (jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call before
the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each
extension connected to the VPS. Use System Programmes [411] (Day Mode), [412]
(Night Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programmes [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and [416] (Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programmes [408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to
enable ringing on every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programmes [411] (Day Mode), [412] (Night
Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programmes [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and [416] (Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
Extension 106
6
VPS
Port 1
Extension 207
7
8
KX-TA series
Port 2
Extension 208
Mailbox for Extension 106
3.3.3 KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration
Whenever possible, we recommend that you use DPT Integration. However, in some cases,
this is not possible. In the following situations, you need to use Inband Integration:
•
•
•
Your PBX is a third-party telephone system.
You have a KX-TD500, but all the extension cards are analogue types.
You have a KX-TD500, but the DHLC/DLC cards are ancient versions (therefore, cannot
support DPT Integration).
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
1. Assignment of the extension card to be connected to the VPS
Installation Manual
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
a) Go to the "1-1 Slot Assignment" screen.
b) Assign the slot card type to be installed to "DHLC", "HLC", "SLC", "ESLC", or "SLC-
M" SLT interface supports.
c) Click "Apply" to save the slot card type assignment.
d) Set "Card Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
2. Assignment of the extension ports to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-3 Extension Port Assignment" screen.
b) Assign "Attribute" of the port to be connected to "TEL" (default).
c) Assign "DN" for the port (click "DN Refer" to check the available directory numbers).
Note:
This programme allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail
port. To reach the Voice Mail system, users dial these extension numbers.
d) Assign "Extension Group No." for the port.
Note:
Specify the extension group number (126 or 127 by default) to which VM or AA
extension groups have been assigned. Group numbers 1 to 128 are available
to the VPS through additional programming.
e) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
f) Set "Port Status" to "INS".
60
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Screen output:
3. Assignment of the extension line to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "4-2 Extension Line 1/2" screen.
b) Set "Data Line Mode" to "Yes".
c) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
This programme prevents the VM port from being interrupted by "Call
Waiting", "Hold Recall", and "Executive Busy Override" features during a call.
Installation Manual
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Screen output:
4. Settings for the trunk (outside line) features
Select the appropriate trunk (outside line) feature settings depending on how
your customer plans to use the VPS.
• The VPS answers all incoming outside calls promptly.
Go to [Recommended Settings (1)].
• The VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified number of
rings.
Go to [Recommended Settings (2)].
• The VPS answers when an extension user does not take the call after a specified
number of rings.
Go to [Recommended Settings (3)].
62
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (1)]
If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (outside line) to a
specific extension number (VPS port).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Notes:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
Please Set "First Ring Delay Timer" to "5 s" (default: "0 s").
Screen output:
Installation Manual
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (2)]
If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by the Operator (Operator
backup):
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (outside line) to a
specific extension number.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Notes:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which Operator has been assigned.
Please Set "First Ring Delay Timer" to "5 s" (default: "0 s").
Screen output:
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "3-1 Trunk Group 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night" for the trunk (outside line) group.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
64
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Screen output:
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2-4 System Timer 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Time" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
This parameter tells the KX-TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension
before forwarding (redirecting).
Installation Manual
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Screen output:
66
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (3)]
If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by user extensions:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (outside line) to a
specific extension number.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Notes:
Please Set "First Ring Delay Timer" to "5 s" (default: "0 s").
Screen output:
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "3-1 Trunk Group 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night" for the trunk (outside line) group.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Notes:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
Installation Manual
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Screen output:
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2-4 System Timer 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Time" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
This parameter tells the KX-TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension
before forwarding (redirecting).
68
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Screen output:
3.3.4 KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 Programming for Inband
Integration via the Manager’s Extension
Select a maximum of 2 extension ports to be connected to the VPS. Plug each extension into
a Voice Mail port.
Go into System Programme [602] and assign the Voice Mail extensions to a different
extension group. By default, all extensions are in Extension Group 1.
Go into System Programme [106] and assign the new Extension Group to Auto Attendant
(AA). Then go into System Programme [813] and assign a floating number to the hunting
group.
If your KX-TD816 or KX-TD1232 supports System Programme [131] (Hunting Group
Assignment), program as follows.
Go into System Programme [131] and enter the Voice Mail extensions into a hunting group.
Go into System Programme [106] and assign the hunting group to Auto Attendant (AA).
Then go into System Programme [813] and assign a floating number to the hunting group.
3.3.5 KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 Programming for Inband
Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool
A. Programming based on DOS terminal
1. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming".
(BATCH [1] or INTERACTIVE [2]).
Installation Manual
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
•
•
Before choosing Batch Programming, you must open a file in the Disk File
Management Menu (Item 3).
Before choosing Interactive Programming, you must connect with the system in the
DSHS Connect/Disconnect menu.
Main Menu
1. System Data Programming (BATCH)
2. System Data Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select the number : [ ]
2. Choose "Station" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
1. Line
2. Station
3. System
4. Toll Restriction
5. ARS
6. Aux. Ports
7. Additional Function
8. Caller ID
Select the number: [2]
3. Choose "Station Setting" from the Station Menu.
Station Menu
1. Station Setting 1
2. Station Setting 2
3. Station Setting 3
4. CO Line Outgoing
5. DIL 1:N
6. ISDN Internal 1
7. ISDN Internal 2
8. TD286 Internal 1
9. TD286 Internal 2
10. Hunting Group Setting 1
11. Hunting Group Setting 2
12. Flexible CO Keys
13. Flexible PF Keys
14. DSS
16. PS Setting 1
17. PS Setting 2
18. PS Setting 3
19. PS Setting 4
20. PS Setting 5
21. PS Setting 6
22. PS Flexible Keys
23. PS System
24. PS Registration
25. PS Termination
26. CS Information
27. PS Data Clear
15. Doorphone
Select the number: [1]
4. Enable XDP ports. Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group 16.
70
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Station Setting 1
Jack EXT Name C X C
Extension Group
Doorphone
Day Night
O D H 0
N P G 1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
6
7
8
9
0
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
01-1 [201] [
01-2 [301] [
02-1 [202] [
02-2 [302] [
03-1 [203] [
03-2 [303] [
04-1 [204] [
04-2 [304] [
05-1 [205] [
05-2 [305] [
06-1 [206] [
06-2 [306] [
07-1 [207] [
07-2 [307] [
08-1 [208] [
08-2 [308] [
] Y N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
] Y - Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
] Y - Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5. Return to the Station.
6. Choose "Hunting Group Setting 1" from the Menu.
Menu
01. Day/Night
14. Opera/Manager/EXT Group
02. Class of Service
03. Emergency/Quick Dial
04. Speed Dial
05. Absent Message
06. Flexible Numbering
07. Account Code
08. Special Carrier
09. Timer
15. Miscellaneous
16. Caller ID Modification
17. Switch Type
18. DID
19. Lunch/Break Time
20. System Time
21. Version
22. ISDN Card
10. Voice Mail
23. T1 Card
11. Voice Mail Integration
12. UCD
24. T1 Minor Error
13. Phantom
Select the number: [15]
7. Choose the "Hunting Group Setting 1" extension group. Set the last extension group to
[AA] for Automated Attendant.
Installation Manual
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
GRP FLT
No. No.
Name Hunting Wait Over
Type Queue flow
Intercept
Day Night Day Night
UCD
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
] Disable [0]
BSY Disable Disable [ ] [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
BSY Disable Disable [ ]
]
AA
[0]
8. Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "Line" and then select "CO
Line Setting 1". Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group.
CO Line Setting
CO
No.
CPC
Detencion
Mode Out
DIL 1:1
EXT No.
DDI
Service
Day
Night
Day
Night
01 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
02 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
03 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
04 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
05 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
06 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
07 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
08 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
09 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
10 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
11 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
12 [44] Disable EXT [305] EXT [305] Disable Disable
72
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
B. Programming based on Windows Application
1. Select File -> New/Open (BATCH Mode) or Connect -> DSHS Connect/Disconnect
(INTERACTIVE Mode).
Note
When you select INTERACTIVE Mode, you must connect the RS232-c cable between your
PC and the TD1232 unit.
2. Select Extns -> Station Hunting, and change the Hunting type to AA for Automated
Attendant into the "Type" column of group 16.
Set the Voicemail extension No. into each of the "Agent Extension" columns, and press
OK.
Installation Manual
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3. Select Line -> CO Lines, and assign first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group into the
"DIL 1:1" column. as below, and press OK.
74
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION
4.1.1 Why DPT Integration is Important
The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard
single line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the communication between the PBX and
VPS is best when DPT Integration is used; the VPS is already set up to communicate through
DPT Integration.
Once DPT Integration is established, the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data
link. This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling, know where from
and why a call is forwarded, and recognise what the caller wants to do. This communication
allows features that are only available with DPT Integration— several of which are described
below:
Table 4-1
DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES
Remote Call Forwarding Set
The subscribers and the Message Manager can
program their extensions from a remote location to
forward various types of calls to a desired extension or
an outside telephone.
Auto Configuration
The VPS knows what extension numbers exist on the
PBX and creates mailboxes for each extension
automatically. Also sets the VPS clock with data from
the PBX clock.
Live Call Screening
Two-Way Recording
Two-Way Transfer
Extension users can monitor messages as they are
being left in the mailbox or intercept if required.
Extension users can record conversations into their
own mailboxes by pressing one button.
Extension users can record conversations into
another person’s mailbox by pressing a button and
dialling an extension number.
Direct Mailbox Access
The subscriber can directly enter his mailbox when he
calls the VPS. He does not have to dial his mailbox
number.
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
Each PBX trunk (outside line) group can be assigned
one of 4 incoming call services: Voice Mail Service,
Automated Attendant Service, Interview Service and
Custom Service.
Intercom Paging*
Callers can page subscribers through built-in
speakers and external paging equipment. For a Caller
ID Caller, if his name has been recorded for the Caller
Name Announcement feature, the name will be
announced at the end of the page.
76
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION
Table 4-1
DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES
Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal)*
The VPS announces the prerecorded Caller ID
callers’ names when: (1) extension users listen to
messages from assigned numbers left in their
mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls from assigned
numbers to the users, and (3) the VPS pages the
users by intercom.
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both
system and personal caller name announcements,
the VPS will use the personal caller name.
Caller ID Call Routing*
The VPS automatically sends calls from pre-assigned
Caller ID numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
or Custom Service.
Personal Greeting for Caller ID* Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting
messages for special callers.
Time Synchronisation
Whenever the PBX sets a new date and time or when
DPT Integration is established, the data is
automatically registered in the VPS.
*
Caller ID Note 1: When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the
PBX, the VPS will wait about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the
Caller ID information properly from the PBX.
This waiting time can be changed by using the WCID command (see 7.2.20
Caller ID Note 2: In the documentation for the KX-TD816/1232/612 series
PBX, the Caller ID feature is called CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation).
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX (see 3.1.1
DPT or Inband Signalling?), you may not be able to utilise some of the features listed
above. For more information, consult your dealer.
Installation Manual
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL
INTEGRATION
A maximum of 2 VPS cards for the VPS can be installed at the KX-TD500. Follow the
procedure below to program the VPS card(s) for DPT Integration.
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
1. Assignment of the VPS card to be connected to the VPS
Note:
If the VPS card to which the VPS will be assigned is already installed in the KX-
TD500, skip the steps a through d. If a new VPS card is installed in the KX-TD500,
follow the steps below.
a) Go to the "1-1 Slot Assignment" screen.
b) Assign the slot "Card Type" to be installed to "DLC" or "DHLC" card.
c) Click "Apply" to save the card type assignment.
d) Set "Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
e) Check the information of "Card Properties" and confirm the LPR version of the card.
Note:
The LPR Version must be "2" or higher for the first VPS card (101: DHLC) to
which the control channel will be assigned, or "1" or higher for the second VPS
card (104: DHLC).
78
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
f) Check the information of "CPU Card Information" and confirm the Software Version
of the KX-TD500. The software version must be Q211AB or higher for DPT Integration
to be utilised.
Notes:
•
If the software version of the KX-TD500 is lower than this, you may not be
able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For
more information, consult your dealer.
•
In the example below, Q211AB represents the software version and
010917A represents the software production date code (year, month, day).
The Area Code 7 indicates just for Spain.
2. Assignment of the ports to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-3 Extension Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the appropriate VPS card (101: DHLC) in the "Card No." menu.
c) Set the attribute of the valid ports to be connected to the VPS to "VPS (DPT)".
d) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
The parameters except for "Attribute" will disappear and the DN (Directory
Number) will be cleared.
Installation Manual
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
3. Assignment of VPS card and its model
a) Go to the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the corresponding equipment number in the "TVP No." menu.
c) Select "TVP200-1" in the "Type" menu.
d) Select the card (101: DHLC for jacks 1-6) which connects with the VPS in the "VPS
Card" menu.
80
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
4. Assignment of the extension ports connected to the VPS
a) Continue the programming in the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the extension port number of the card (DLC/DHLC) to which the VPS (DPT) jack
is to be connected in the "Port No." menu.
Notes:
•
•
You can assign a maximum of 6 jacks (12 ports) with the KX-TD500.
This menu is displayed only when the attribute of the ports is assigned to
"VPS (DPT)" in step 2.
•
•
This programme tells the KX-TD500 which extension ports are connected to
the VPS. This allows the KX-TD500 to send the proper Digital Integration
information to these ports.
Jack No.1 must be assigned, because its port is used as the channel to
control the VPS.
c) Assign "DN" for the port (click "DN Refer" to check the available directory numbers).
Note:
This programme allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail
port. Since each port connected to the VPS provides two extensions, this
enables you to assign extension numbers to each port. To reach the Voice Mail
system, users dial these extension numbers.
d) Assign "Extension Group No." for the port.
Note:
Specify the extension group number (126 or 127 by default) to which VM or AA
is assigned. Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the VPS through
additional programming.
(Selecting VM has the same effect as selecting AA, regardless of how the VPS
is programmed.)
Installation Manual
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
e) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
f) Set "Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
5. To set the trunk (outside line) features, follow the instructions in "Settings for the trunk
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
8. Turn the power switch off at the VPS and set the Rotary Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the Rotary Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts).
9. Turn the power switch back on at the VPS and wait approximately 7-8 min while the system
initialises.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
82
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•
•
•
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
"CARD TEST" is displayed on the screen.
"SYSTEM SETUP" is displayed.
Screen output:
CARD TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP...
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
11... 12... 13... 14... 15... 16... 17...
•
The VPS tests the CPU board, the hard disk drive, and
the CO cards as "SYSTEM SETUP..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not Established"
Table 4-2
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is not a KX-TD series system. Since Connect a KX-TD series PBX
the VPS is configured to communicate with the and set the PBX type by using
KX-TD1232, this message will always appear
when connecting to another type of PBX.
Quick Setup (see Section 5
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports Confirm the cabling is
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
connected as described in
The PBX is a KX-TD series but does not have Consult your dealer
the proper level of software required to support or use Inband Integration under
DPT Integration.
hardware settings.
Installation Manual
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Table 4-2
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration
DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven programme.
When the System Administrator starts operation, the system asks for the terminal
type. By choosing VT100 [2], all parameters can be set through the menu-driven
programme.
Please Select Your Terminal Type.
1. ASCII TERMINAL
2. VT100
Please Enter the Number := ______
Please Enter the Number:= [2]
Select [2] because Quick Setup is only available when using a personal computer
that can emulate a VT100 terminal.
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [2065]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the Rotary Switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete.
84
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD500 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD500 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
VPS, the PBX transmits the extension information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
Installation Manual
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND
KX-TD612
Notes
•
•
Do not use System Programmes [106], [131], [602] or [813] for DPT Integration.
The next 2 sections (4.3.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
the KX-TD1232 as examples. Please refer to them for the KX-TD816 and the KX-
TD612.
4.3.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
DPT Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TD1232 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with
the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
Note
Two methods of programming are available on the KX-TD1232. The instructions
below show how to program without the operating and maintenance tool. For
instructions on programming with the operating and maintenance tool, please see
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TD1232 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to
enter the system programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Verify Software–If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, remember to check both
cabinets. The software must be the same in each. Check the software version of the KX-
TD1232 using System Programme [116].
Example: P111GYMMDDA
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day).
If the software version of the PBX is old, you may not be able to utilise some of the
features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, consult your
dealer.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [116].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
86
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
c) Enter the system number ([0] or [1], master/slave). The system displays the ROM
version and the date it was created.
This version must be the required version for DPT Integration to be utilised (both
systems if system connection is used).
2. Set the date and time using System Programme [000].
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Programme [003].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This programme tells the PBX which jack will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those ports.
Notes
•
You can assign a maximum of 6 jacks (12 ports) with the KX-TD1232 or KX-
TD816.
•
If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, all Voice Mail Ports should be
assigned to either the Master or Slave System.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [126] or [117].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: M: # # #
c) Enter the jack number (02-64) of the port you will use for the Voice Mail.
d) Press STORE.
e) Press END (HOLD) when finished.
Conditions:
Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port. A jack
programmed as a Manager Extension (System
Programme [006]) cannot be used in this programme.
5. Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering.
System Programme [127] or [118] (Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) is
automatically set. This programme allows you to assign an extension number to each
Voice Mail port. Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions, this enables
you to assign extension numbers to each port. You can assign any extension number
that is not already assigned to another port. To reach the VPS, users dial these
extension numbers. It is not necessary to change the default programming for the
extensions 265 and 266 (or 165 and 166).
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [127] or [118].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM NO?
c) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM-01:#_ _ -1: 265 (or 165)
( _ _ = the port number you entered in programme 126 [or 117])
d) Enter the Extension Number that you want this port to have.
(The default extension number for port 1: 265 [or 165]; port 2: 266 [or 166])
e) Press STORE.
Installation Manual
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
f) Repeat steps c, d, and e until all extension numbers are entered.
Conditions:
No 2 jacks on the system can have the same
extension number. If you try to enter a number that is
already assigned, you will hear an error tone. Each
digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail
ports and must have 2 different extension numbers
assigned.
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
8. Turn the power switch off at the VPS and set the Rotary Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the Rotary Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts).
9. Turn the power switch back on at the VPS and wait approximately 7-8 min while the system
initialises.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•
•
•
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
"CARD TEST" is displayed on the screen.
"SYSTEM SETUP" is displayed.
Screen output:
CARD TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP...
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
11... 12... 13... 14... 15... 16... 17...
•
The VPS tests the CPU board, the hard disk drive, and
the CO cards as "SYSTEM SETUP..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
** ON LINE MODE **
88
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
10.Change the PBX type in the VPS programming menu in the following sequence.
•
System prompts [>] are displayed on the screen. Press ENTER.
Screen output:
Please Select Your Terminal Type.
1. ASCII TERMINAL
2. VT100
Please Enter the Number := ______
•
Go to the PBX type selection menu,
By selecting your terminal type [1] or [2] and press ENTER,
Select [1] and press ENTER
Select [6] and press ENTER
Select [3] and press ENTER
Select [1] and press ENTER
Screen output:
Programm - Hardware Setting - PBX Interface Parameters - Dialing Parameters Menu
PBX Type [Other]
1. Other Manufacturers 2. KXT series
•
Select [2] (and press ENTER)
Enter the Model Number
1. T308 2. T616 3. T1232/TA series 4. T96 5. T336
6. TD816 7. TD1232/612 8. TD500 9. Reserved
•
•
Select [7] (and press ENTER)
Escape the programming menu by entering Backslash Key until System prompt
[>] comes to be visible.
Check the LED on the VPS unit. If the light is on, the DPT connection between VPS
and PBX is established.
If the LED is flashing, the DPT connection cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not Established"
Table 4-3
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is not a KX-TD series system. Since Connect a KX-TD series PBX
the VPS is configured to communicate with the and set the PBX type by using
KX-TD1232, this message will always appear
when connecting to another type of PBX.
Quick Setup (see
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports Confirm the cabling is
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
connected as described in
The PBX is a KX-TD series but does not have Consult your dealer
the proper level of software required to support or use Inband Integration under
DPT Integration.
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration
DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
Installation Manual
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
11. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [> ] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven programme.
When the System Administrator starts operation, the system asks for the terminal type.
By choosing VT100 [2], all parameters can be set through the menu-driven programme.
Please Select Your Terminal Type.
1. ASCII TERMINAL
2. VT100
Please Enter the Number := ______
Please Enter the Number:= [2]
Select [2] because Quick Setup is only available when using a personal computer that
can emulate a VT100 terminal.
12. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [265]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the Rotary Switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
VPS, the PBX transmits the extension information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
90
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
4.3.2 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance
Tool
Follow these steps after communication between the KX-TD1232 and the programming
software has been established. Refer to the Operating and Maintenance manual for
connection information.
A. Programming based on DOS terminal
1. Check the software version.
a) Go to the Main Menu. Press the ALT key and the letter [V] at the same time.
b) Verify the Operating and Maintenance version being used.
Sample display:
DB data (PC): Empty
Version:3.03X
Note
If you have an older version of the maintenance tool but have the correct ROM
version in the system, you may still program the KX-TD1232 but you must
program using the Manager's Extension.
c) Verify the ROM version of the KX-TD1232.
Example: P111GYMMDDB
If the software version of the PBX is old, you may not be able to utilise some of
the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, consult
your dealer.
In the example above, the underlined digits represent the software production date code
(year, month, day).
2. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming" (BATCH [1] or
INTERACTIVE [2]).
Main Menu
1. System Data Programming (BATCH)
2. System Data Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select the number : [ ]
Installation Manual
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
3. Choose "System" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
1. Line
2. Station
3. System
4. Toll Restriction
5. LCR
6. Aux. Ports
7. Additional Function
8. FWD/DND Information
Select the number : [ 3 ]
4. Choose "Voice Mail Integration" from the System Menu.
System Menu
01. Day/Night
11. Phantom
02. Class of Service
03. Emergency/Dial
04. Speed Dial
05. Absent Message
06. Flexible Numbering
07. Account Code
08. Timer
12. Operator/Manager
13. UCD Time Table/Message Rec. Time
14. Miscellaneous
15. Quick Dial
16. System Time
17. Version
18. ISDN Card
09. Voice Mail
19. CS-INF Card
10. Voice Mail Integration
Select the number: [10]
5. First, enter the port numbers that will be connected to the VPS. If desired, change the
default extension numbers of the Voice Mail ports.
92
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
Voice Mail Integration
VM Port No.
Master [07] [08] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
Slave ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
]
]
[
VM
Jack
07-1
EXT VMG
VM
Jack
EXT VMG
Master 01
[265]
[266]
[267]
[268]
[269]
[270]
[277]
[278]
[281]
[282]
[283]
[284]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Slave 13
14
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
[271]
[272]
[273]
[274]
[275]
[276]
[279]
[280]
[285]
[286]
[287]
[288]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
07-2
08-1
08-2
-1
15
16
17
-2
18
-1
19
-2
20
-1
21
-2
22
-1
23
-2
24
Note
The extension numbers are different depending on your PBX (e.g., 265, 266, 267...).
6. Step 6 should only be done if the VPS is going to answer all incoming Telephone
Company lines directly.
Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "Line" and then select "CO
Line Setting 2". Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group.
CO Line Setting
CO
No
CPC
Detection
DIL 1:1
EXT No
DIL
Service
Mode Out
Day
Night
Day
Night
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
[44] Disable
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
EXT[265] EXT[265]
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Disable Disable
Installation Manual
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
The required programming is now complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able
to communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed
and telephones connected before starting the VPS.
the VPS, the PBX transmits the extension information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
B. Programming based on Windows Application
1. Select File -> New/Open (BATCH Mode) or Connect -> DSHS Connect/Disconnect
(INTERACTIVE Mode).
Note
When you select INTERACTIVE Mode, connect the RS232-c cable between your PC and
the TD1232 unit.
2. Select System -> Voice Mail -> Voice Mail Ports, and set the Voice mail Jack No. into
the "Jack" column of Odd Port No. as below, and press OK.
94
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KX-TD612
3. Select Line -> CO Lines, and assign first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group into the
"DIL 1:1" column as below, and press OK.
Note
The extension numbers are different depending on your PBX (eg., 265, 266, 267...).
Installation Manual
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES
AND SETUP PROCEDURES
The following features can be used on any KX-T proprietary telephone (7000/7300 series
analogue; 7200/7400/7500 series digital).
4.4.1 Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming
LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes. The notification method is
programmable for hands-free or private. Hands-free allows the user to monitor a recording
through the speakerphone and, if desired, intercept the call by lifting the handset. The private
mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded. By pressing the
LCS button, the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off-hook. System
Programming or PC Programming also determines whether the mailbox continues to record
after the user intercepts the call.
4.4.2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment
To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have the
LCS button lit. To light this button on the telephone, press the LCS button, then enter the
password. This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the
messages as they are being left. (It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate
this feature.)
PC programming is also possible.
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number [799].
3. Enter a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) twice.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: The 3-digit password you entered is displayed.
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.4.3 Live Call Screening Password Cancelling
To cancel the password, follow the procedure below. (It is not necessary to enter PITS
Programming to activate this feature).
PC programming is also possible.
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number [799].
3. Enter the password ([000]-[999]).
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: Password Cancel
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
96
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.4.4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via
System Programming
This programme allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the
extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening.
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter [617] or [616] from system programme.
2. Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Jack No.?
3. Enter the jack number.
Screen output: # _ _ :Stop Rec
(_ _ = the jack number you entered)
4. Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) until the desired selection is displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
7. Repeat the steps 4 to 6 until all jacks are programmed.
4.4.5 Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode
Assignment via Station Programming
This programme assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox. It
determines whether an alert tone is sent or whether the recorded message is played through
the built-in speaker of the extension. The default mode is hands-free. (This is station level
programming and should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter Station Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Dial the code for the mode you want this telephone to have.
Hands-Free = 11
Private = 12
Screen output: Hands-Free or Private
3. Press STORE.
4. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
None
A single-line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone can
also be used to monitor an incoming message. Be sure that Live Call Screening on the
connected proprietary telephone has been activated. This feature is useful when you are using
a cordless telephone. The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is
being recorded. To intercept the call, hang up and go off-hook.
Installation Manual
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
4.4.6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TD500 users can program Live Call Screening features via PC programming. Follow
the procedure below to assign each feature.
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
1. Go to "4-2 Extension Line 1/2" screen.
Screen output:
2. Select the "Card No." and "Port No." which you are going to program.
3. In "LCS Settings":
a) To set LCS Password, Enter a 3-digit number (using "0-9") in "LCS Password".
Note
To cancel the password, erase the 3-digit number
b) To assign LCS Recording Mode, Set "Recording Mode" to "Keep Rec" or "Stop Rec".
c) To assign LCS Private/Hands-free Mode, Set "Operation Mode" to "Private" or
"Hands-free".
d) To activate the LCS status, Set "Status" to "Active".
Note
To utilise the Live Call Screening features, it is necessary to first assign the LCS
then activate the LCS status.
4. Click "Apply".
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each extension.
98
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
4.4.7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have an LCS
button lit at the time of the message reception. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key
with a lamp. Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button on an extension. (This is
station level programming and should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired FLEXIBLE (CO or DSS/BLF) button you want to assign as the LCS
button.
3. Dial [85] or [92].
Screen output: LCS
4. Press STORE.
5. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.4.8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via
Station Programming
This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Live Call
Screening Cancel button.
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the Flexible (CO, DSS) button that you wish to assign as a Live Call Screening
Cancel button.
3. Dial [86] or [93].
Screen output: LCS Cancel
4. Press STORE. The STORE indicator light turns on.
The display shows the initial programming mode.
5. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional; Live Call Screening can also
be cancelled by Pressing the FLASH (RECALL) button.
Installation Manual
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
4.4.9 TWR (Two-Way Recording) Button Assignment via
Station Programming
For the Two-Way Recording feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWR
button on it. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a TWR button on an extension. (This is a station level programme and should
be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the Flexible button (CO or DSS/BLF) that you want to assign as the TWR button.
3. Dial [83] or [90].
Screen output: 2Way-Rec:
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2Way-Rec: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press Store.
6. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a TWR button. If this key is pressed
when all Voice Mail ports are busy, the user will hear
reorder tone.
4.4.10 TWT (Two-Way Transfer) Button Assignment via
Station Programming
For the Two-Way Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWT
button on it. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a TWT button on an extension. (This is an extension level programme and
should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired FLEXIBLE (CO or DSS/BLF) key that you want to assign as the TWT
button.
3. Dial [84] or [91].
Screen output: 2Way-Trans:
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2Way-Trans: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
100
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
6. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a TWT button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will
hear reorder tone.
4.4.11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station
Programming
This feature allows an extension user to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox. This is
available with both DPT and Inband Integrations.
PC programming is also possible.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) key that you want to assign as the VTR
button.
3. Dial [82] or [8].
Screen output: VTR
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: VTR- _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a VTR button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will
hear reorder tone.
4.4.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TD500 users can assign buttons via PC programming. Follow the procedure below to
assign each button.
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
2. Select the "Card No." and "Port No." which you are going to program.
3. Click "CO Key" in the upper right corner. "Flexible CO Key" screen (for all CO Keys)
displays.
Installation Manual
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
Screen output:
4. Click the Key Number to which a button will be assigned.
"Flexible CO Key" screen displays.
Screen output:
5. Select the desired Key Type. When 2WAY-REC, 2WAY-TRN, or VTR is selected, enter
the extension number in "DN".
102
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
Example screen output:
6. Click "OK". "Flexible CO Key" screen (for all CO Keys) displays again.
7. Click "OK". "4-2 Extension Line 1/2" screen displays again.
8. Click "OK" or "Apply".
9. Repeat these steps for each extension.
4.4.13 Live Call Screening Activation
To activate the Live Call Screening status, follow the steps below.
PC programming is also possible.
1. Press the assigned LCS Button.
2. Press the assigned LCS Password.
3. Confirm the assigned LCS Button is red-on.
4. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
To activate the Live Call Screening features, it is
necessary to light the LCS button after assigning the
LCS password and LCS button.
4.4.14 Live Call Screening Password Control
This feature allows Operator(s) and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS
at any extension. If a user forgets the pre-programmed password, Operator(s) and the
Manager of the PBX can cancel the LCS password.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Dial [03].
Installation Manual
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
3. Dial the desired Extension Number, or Press [ ] to remove all passwords.
4. Press STORE.
5. To exit the Station Programming mode, Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.4.15 TWR (Two-Way Recording) into Mailbox
This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their mailboxes by pressing
the Two-Way Recording (TWR) button.
4.4.16 TWT (Two-Way Transfer) into Mailbox
This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person’s mailbox
by pressing the Two-Way Transfer (TWT) button and dialling the mailbox number. This is
commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants
the message recorded in the mailbox at the same time.
4.4.17 A Restriction on TWR/TWT Activation
If your PBX is a basic KX-TD500, you can have only 8 simultaneous activations of Two-Way
Recording and Two-Way Transfer, because the basic KX-TD500 supports only 8 three-way
conferences. However, if you add the KX-TD50104 TSW-CONF (TSW Conference Expansion)
Card to your PBX, then the PBX supports an additional 64 three-way conferences. In this case,
the PBX will not limit the VPS on Two-Way conversation recordings.
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
104
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
5.1 STARTING UP
5.1.1 Before Programming
1. Determine the customer’s needs.
•
Work with the owner, manager, and receptionist to build the Custom Service
Greetings and Holiday Greetings.
•
•
Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings.
Check the software level of the PBX.
2. Use "System Administration" and your personal computer for the startup sequence.
3. After the system becomes "on line", disconnect the outside (CO) lines going into the system
until the greetings have been completed.
•
It is important to spend time training the receptionist. Making sure that the
receptionist understands the system and is capable of answering basic questions will
save you time in the end.
•
Show the receptionist how to transfer "General Delivery Mailbox" messages. See
5.1.2 Quick Setup
Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items. Each of these must
be initially set to start the VPS operation.
Notes
•
•
Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software.
Quick Setup cannot be performed in ASCII mode.
1. PBX type
2. Extension numbers of VPS ports
3. Extension numbers for mailboxes
4. Creating mailboxes
5. Port service setting
6. Password setting
7. Date and time setting
8. Activating the Quick Setup
Depending on your PBX type, some steps will be skipped as shown below.
106
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
Table 5-1
PBX Type
KX-T308/T616
Required Procedures
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
KX-T1232/TA series/
T336/T96
4
5
6
Non-Panasonic System
KX-TD816/1232/500/612
1
1
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup
The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect. If you press "\", you will have
to start over. Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data.
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-
digits long.
At the System Administration Top Menu, Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then QSET
Screen output:
System Administration Top Menu
or
System Administration Top Menu
5
3
QSET
Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems
This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate
in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system. The system will prompt you to enter, modify or
confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select.
By entering the appropriate information in the following screens, the system sets PBX
integration parameters, identifies the extension numbers connected to it, creates default
mailboxes, sets its ports to handle callers with automated attendant or voice mail service,
sets system passwords and sets the time and date. Finally, it confirms that you want to
activate the system based on the information you entered, modified or confirmed.
To proceed, press Enter. To exit and cancel Quick Setup now, press \ .
1. PBX Type
a) Press ENTER.
Installation Manual
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
Screen output:
Quick Setup - PBX type
Please select your PBX type.
1. KX-T308
2. KX-T616
3. KX-T1232/TA series
4. KX-T96
5. KX-T336
6. KX-TD816
7. KX-TD1232/TD612
8. KX-TD500
9. Reserved
0. OTHERS
b) Select your PBX type. The required steps are different for some models. Go to the step
indicated below for that type.
Table 5-2
1. KX-T308, 2. KX-T616
Go to Step 2.
Go to Step 3.
Go to Step 4.
3. KX-T1232/KX-TA series, 4. KX-T96,
5. KX-T336, 0. Others
6. KX-TD816, 7. KX-TD1232/TD612, 8. KX-TD500
Note
DPT Integration with the KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, or KX-TD500 will be activated
automatically by selecting "6. KX-TD816", "7. KX-TD1232/TD612", or
"8. KX-TD500".
DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time and date
by transferring extension and time information from the PBX automatically.
2. Extension Numbers of VPS Ports
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Enter extension number of VPS Port
Please enter extension number of VPS.
1:
7:
2:
8:
3:
9:
4:
10:
5:
11:
6:
12:
Please enter extension numbers.
(2 digits) : =
S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2-digit numbers. This improves the VPS
integration with the KX-T308 or KX-T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate between
VPS extensions and non-VPS extensions.
Type [S] to go to the next screen.
3. Extension Numbers for Mailboxes
108
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Enter Extensions for Mailboxes
What extensions need a mailbox on this system?
1:
6:
2:
7:
3:
8:
4:
9:
5:
10:
15:
20:
25:
30:
35:
40:
45:
50:
55:
60:
11:
16:
21:
26:
31:
36:
41:
46:
51:
56:
61:
12:
17:
22:
27:
32:
37:
42:
47:
52:
57:
62:
13:
18:
23:
28:
33:
38:
43:
48:
53:
58:
63:
14:
19:
24:
29:
34:
39:
44:
49:
54:
59:
64:
Please enter extension numbers.
: =
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes (2 to 5 digits).
For example, to enter the extension number 201, Press [201] and Press ENTER. You
can also enter multiple extensions. Enter the extensions from No.201 to No.210 by
Pressing [201-210] and Pressing ENTER.
The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered. (See Step 4.)
Note
The VPS accepts any extension numbers within a 2- to 5-digit range. Up to 1022
extension numbers can be entered.
4. Creating Mailboxes
To go to the next screen (S) or to change the menu (P or N), the cursor must be in the
MBX column.
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Mailbox Editing
Extension and mailbox list Assigned 17
Vacant 1005
Page 1/2
EXTN.
• • •
210
MBX
201
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
OWNER (Last Name)
MAKE (Make/Delete)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Installation Manual
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
a) To create or discard mailboxes
In the "MAKE (Make/Delete)" field: Type [M] (Make) to create the mailbox; Type [D]
(Delete) to discard the mailbox. If there are more than 1022 mailboxes, the first 1022 of
them are displayed with "Make" and the rest are displayed with "Delete" (screen output:
[Assigned 1022, Vacant 0]).
To change the status of a mailbox from "Delete" to "Make", first change the status of a
mailbox from "Make" to "Delete" (screen output: [Assigned 1021, Vacant 1]). Then
change the status from "Delete" to "Make".
b) Owner’s last name
Up to 16 alphabet characters can be assigned as an Owner’s Last Name.
Note
• Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen
Panasonic KX-TD Series System
The same numbers as the extensions of the KX-TD series system that were
automatically transmitted to the VPS—Auto Configuration.
Non-KX-TD Series System
The same numbers as those of the extensions entered in step 3.
• The length of mailbox numbers
The Message Manager mailbox (General Delivery Mailbox) might be 2- to 5-digits long
(98, 998, 9998, or 99998).
The System Manager mailbox might be 2- to 5-digits long (99, 999, 9999, or 99999).
If both 3 and 4-digit extension numbers exist at the same time, the VPS will unify all
mailbox numbers to 4-digit length by entering [0] at the end of all 3-digit numbers.
Example:
Extension
Numbers
Mailbox
Numbers
201
202
203
2000
2001
2002
201(0) *
202(0) *
203(0)*
2000
2001
2002
*The VPS puts [0] at the end of 3-digit numbers.
Note
After creating mailboxes for subscribers by Quick Setup, the COS parameter
number 1 will be set to "Yes". It will stay "No" for COS number 2 through number
62.
To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner’s Last
110
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
Name" feature using the Owner’s Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service or
Voice Mail Service.
5. Port Service Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup- Port Service Setting
All ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard automated atten-
dant operation, day and night mode, using the Custom Service feature (Custom
1). You can change the operation to standard voice mail (Custom 2) or leave it
as automated attendant. If necessary, Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified
under the menu 'Program -> Service Setting -> Custom Service'.
Day Mode
Auto. Attend.
Night Mode
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
PORT 5
PORT 6
PORT 7
PORT 8
PORT 9
PORT 10
PORT 11
PORT 12
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
A: Auto. Attend., V: Voice Mail, S: Next Screen
Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1), Voice Mail (using Custom 2)
Incoming Call Services for all ports (Day/Night) can be defined by this setting. Default
values for all ports (Day/Night) are "Automated Attendant Service (Custom 1)". To select
other incoming call services, go to "Setting Ports".
6. Password Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup-Password Setting
System Administrator Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
System Reset/Clear Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset/Clear Password
in this screen, if necessary.
IMPORTANT
•
We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for
maximum protection against hackers.
•
•
Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
Please change the password periodically (for instructions, see 7.2.3 Set
Installation Manual
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
To go to the next screen without assigning the password, Press ENTER.
7. Date and Time Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup-Time Setting
Current time is 3:04, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Current date is MON 1-JAN-2001
Enter new date (DD-MM-YY) : =
Enter the time (hour, minute as 2 digits, comma and A or P) and date (day, month and
year in 2 digits).
To go to the next screen, Press ENTER.
8. Activating the Quick Setup
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select 'Yes.'
To cancel and exit, select 'No.'
1: Yes
2: No
To activate the Quick Setup, Press [1] and Press ENTER.
Note
To cancel the Quick Setup, Press [2] and Press ENTER. This cancels all changes
made up to this point.
The VPS begins to change system programming data.
Screen output:
Quick-Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select "Yes."
To cancel and exit, select "No."
1: Yes
2: No
Setup 998...
Then "CARD TEST..." "SYSTEM SETUP..." and "1...2...3..." appear on the screen one
by one.
Screen output:
CARD TEST ...
SYSTEM SETUP ...
1 ... 2 ... 3 ...
112
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 STARTING UP
Screen output when Quick Setup is finished:
**ON LINE MODE**
>
Installation Manual
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Design each system according to the needs of your customer. You should be familiar with all
options for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect. Each
port can be assigned as Voice Mail, Interview Service, Automated Attendant, or Custom
Service. Custom Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the
other services by pressing one key. We recommend programming all ports as Custom
Service for caller convenience.
5.2.1 Custom Service Setting Example
Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail. Custom
Service offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location
quickly and easily.
Sample Company Greeting 1
"Thank you for calling ABC company". (Company greeting should be short!)
Sample Custom Service Message
"If you know the extension number of the person you are calling, you can dial it at any time.
For a list of extensions, Press [1]; to reach the sales section, Press [2]; to reach the service
section, Press [3]; if you would like to place an order, Press [4]; all other callers, please wait
and an operator will be right with you".
Sample Custom Service Tree
Create a tree to design a route that leads callers to the desired extension, mailbox, or next
menu. This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers.
Moreover, callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times. Discuss
available options with the customer before programming the system.
Company Greeting
Custom Service
100
Main Greeting
all ports day
Custom 2
Extension List
Custom 3
Extension List
Transfer
to Service
Transfer
to Orders
New Cars
Used Cars
The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the
VPS. Then create a branch for each option until each caller option has been documented.
Next, fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily remember what action
corresponds to each keystroke.
114
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Remember that it is possible and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another
custom service. For example, if someone presses [1] for sales, you might want another menu
to say "for new car sales, press [1]; for used car sales, press [2]". This way, callers are routed
directly to the person best suited to handle them.
Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages
If you are an airline or travel agency, your callers might not be fluent in English. You can easily
accommodate several languages with Custom Service. For example, each key on the keypad
(there are 12 keys) could be assigned to a language. Record Custom Service Menu 100 so
that the caller can select a language with one-touch dialling. For example, the top menu could
be: "For English, press 1. For French, press 2. For Spanish, press 3. For German, press 4. For
Japanese, press 5. For Chinese, press 6... etc." (of course, selections should be recorded in
their respective languages).
At the next level, create menus in each language for Day Mode. For example, Custom Service
Menu 2 (the one for English callers) might be: "For departure information, press 1. For arrival
information, press 2. For reservations, press 3. To leave a message, press 4. To send a fax,
press 5". Thus at this level (or at an even lower level) a caller can be guided in his native tongue
to the right person (extension), the right message-taker (mailbox), or the right device (fax
machine).
In parallel, create menus in each language for Night, Lunch, and Break Modes. For example,
Custom Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be: "Sorry, we are closed for the day. Our
regular business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. If you would like to
leave a message, press 1 now. If you would like to send a fax, press 2 now". Record a similar
message for the other languages in each mode.
5.2.2 Custom Service Features
Time Service (1-5-2-2)
Set each day of the week for the correct Day, Night, Lunch, or Break Mode.
Intercom Paging (1-5-7-7)
This feature is only available with DPT Integration.
When needed, change the paging code for each of the paging groups.
Example for KX-TD1232: All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in
system programme [602]. No hunting type assigned in system programme [106]. Assign
each salesperson’s mailbox to a different COS in the VPS and assign the paging group to
that COS. (This tells the VPS which paging group to dial). In the Intercom paging section,
assign the number "6303" or "333" to the paging group assigned to the sales dept.
Fax Management (1-5-7-8)
Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX. If the CNG tone is heard,
the VPS will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine. If the first fax machine is
busy or does not answer (is out of paper), the VPS forwards the call to the second fax machine.
Installation Manual
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
This also allows an extension to be assigned as the fax manager to be notified on incoming
faxes.
Disconnect Parameter (1-5-7-9)
Determines how many seconds of silence the VPS allows during a caller’s message before
disconnecting the call.
RS-232C Settings (1-6-1)
Allows the System Administrator to change the baud rate, parity bit, etc.
Port Setting (1-6-2)
Only to be used when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Use the
CPC control of the PBX for normal disconnect problems.
Dialing Parameters (1-6-3-1)
These parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted.
Most of the settings will be left unchanged. The only setting that will be changed quite often is
the Transfer Sequence for the operator or the extension. By default, it is set at FX on DPT
Integration and FTX for Inband Integration. In other words, the voice processor dials the flash
(recall), waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number. By default, the VPS will stay
on the line to monitor the status of the call. If the extension user answers, the voice processor
will announce "you have a call" prior to releasing the call. This can be alleviated by adding the
letter "A" or "D" to the sequence. "A" stands for answer; the call will be transferred without the
announcement "you have a call". For a blind or unscreened transfer, add the letter "D" for
disconnect.
5.2.3 Custom Service Programming
After you have finished constructing the tree, enter the System Programming Custom Service
Settings Menu.
Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Setting)
Enter The Number: = 2 (Custom Service)
The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit. Enter the desired
number (1-100).
The Custom Service screen is displayed:
116
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Program - Service Setting - Custom Service Setting - Custom 1 (Not recorded)
1. Description [
:=
]
2. Prompt Mode [ System ]
1:System 2:User1 3:User2 :=
3. Menu Repeat Cycle [ 3 ] (1-3 times) :=
4. Call Transfer Anytime [ Extn. ] (Extn./Mbx/No) :=
5. Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s) :=
6. No DTMF Input Operation [ c ] (a - f)
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
Select Operation :=
7. Keypad Assignment
Keypad 0 [ c ]
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
h. Call Transfer Service
i. Subscriber Service
j. Department Dialing
k. Dial by Name
l. Repeat Menu
m. Main Menu
n. Fax Transfer
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
g. Voice Mail Service
Enter data into the Custom Service menu; use the table below as a guide.
Table 5-3
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description
Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
Specifies the language that the caller will hear when
calling this Custom Service.
3. User 2
(System)
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 Times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the Custom Service
menu will be repeated before the No DTMF Input entry
is used.
Installation Manual
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Table 5-3
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Call Transfer
Any Time
Extn./Mbx/No
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when
dialling an extension or mailbox number during the
menu. If this entry is set to "Extn.", the caller will be
transferred to the corresponding extension. If it is set to
"Mbx", the caller will be sent directly to the
(Extn.)
corresponding mailbox. If it is set to "No", extension
transfer and mailbox transfer are disabled; only 1-digit
entries work (following the Custom Service menu).
Note: This parameter should be set to "No" when
Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service
option and it is desired that digits can be entered very
quickly to specify a mailbox. Therefore, in most cases,
"No" is the best setting for this parameter. This is
especially true if you do not want to explain "Call
Transfer Any Time" in your Custom Service menu
recording.
Wait for
Second Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu
choice within the Custom Service. If a second digit is
not dialled within the specified time, the menu choice is
used.
No DTMF
Input
a.-f.
(c.)
Used when a caller does not dial anything when
hearing the menu (usually rotary callers).
Operation
a.-n.
( : d; 0: c;
Others: None)
Specifies the action to be performed when a keypad
digit is dialled. Callers can access specific services by
pressing the appropriate keys on their telephones.
Keypad
Assignment
Keypad Assignment Options
Table 5-4
Entry
Function
Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific
mailbox.
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
Transfers the caller to a specific extension.
Transfers the caller to the operator.
Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller.
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
g. Voice Mail Service
Returns the caller to the previous menu.
Transfers the caller to another Custom Service and
plays the menu.
Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
118
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Table 5-4
Entry
Function
Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant
Service.
h. Call Transfer Service
Allows the caller to access Subscriber Service. Digits
received after entering this code are assumed to be
the subscriber’s mailbox number. If this option is
enabled, it is strongly recommended that each
subscriber establish a password; this will prevent
unauthorised callers from accidentally or intentionally
accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
i. Subscriber Service
j. Department Dialling
k. Dial by Name
Transfer the caller to the Department Dialling menu.
Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the last name of the person they wish to reach, then
transfers him to the corresponding extension.
l. Repeat Menu
m. Main Menu
Repeats the Custom Service menu prompt.
Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu.
Allows the caller to send fax messages to the
extension specified as the fax extension.
n. Fax Transfer
5.2.4 Recording Menus
After you have finished entering the parameters in each menu, record the menu messages.
Menu messages inform the caller of available options and their corresponding keys. For this
reason, the prompts must match the programming that has been input.
Note
The Message Manager’s mailbox might be 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
1. Dial an Extension Number that is connected to the VPS to access the Message
Manager’s mailbox (998).
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 998] to enter the Message Manager’s mailbox.
3. Press [5] to modify messages.
4. Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
5. You will hear:
Enter the Custom Service prompt number [1] through [100].
To record Custom Service Exit prompt, press [0].
6. Enter Custom Service Number you want to record.
7. You will hear:
Custom Service number (entered number).
Record menu at the tone...
Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded, using the tree
that you created as a guide.
Installation Manual
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2.5 Checking Operation
After you have entered and recorded all menus, it is important to try the programme yourself
to see that all functions perform properly. Dial into the system and try all the choices to see if
you are routed correctly. Verify that each menu choice works as it should.
5.2.6 Voice Mail
Voice Mail service is a message-taking service that allows non-subscribers to leave messages
for subscribers. This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live
person. This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired.
Callers can access Voice Mail service by:
•
•
•
•
Voice Mail Port—This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports of
the VPS. Callers reaching these ports immediately access Voice Mail service.
Voice Mail Trunk—This service can be programmed on a per trunk (outside line) basis.
Callers reaching these trunks (outside lines) immediately access Voice Mail service.
Service Access Command—A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialling [#6]
during a call.
Via Custom Service—This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom
Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Voice Mail service.
5.2.7 Mailbox Groups
This programme allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at once. The message
activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones. These mailboxes
may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The Message Manager
can record a voice label for each System Group Distribution List (see D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES). There are 20 groups available, and each group list can have up to 20 entries.
To establish a mailbox group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-1-1]
(Program-System Parameter-System Group Assignment-Mailbox Group-Enter).
2. Assign a List Number to the Mailbox Group. This number can be from 2-5 digits (same as
mailbox numbers). This number must be an unused number. In other words, the number
assigned to this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution List
number or mailbox number. For example, we will use the number 250.
There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List:
Option A:
For inside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed so
that any subscriber can press [2] and then enter the list number (which is [250] in this
example) to deliver a message. The message will be delivered to all specified
mailboxes.
Option B:
For outside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed as
a custom greeting for incoming callers. For instance, the greeting might be: "To leave a
120
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
message for the parts section, press 3". The digit "3" would be assigned to System
Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting.
Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the
individual extension.
5.2.8 Extension Groups
An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox. These extensions may
be assembled into a list called an Extension Group. The extensions in the group cannot have
a personal mailbox! When a message is left in this mailbox, it lights all of the message waiting
lamps of the phones that are in this group. There are 20 groups available, and each group can
have up to 20 entries.
When a message is left for the extension group, it will light the message waiting lamps on each
phone. The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other
phones. Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a specific
person (e.g., a Parts Centre, Technical Support Group, etc.).
To establish an extension group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-2-1]
(Program-System Parameter-System Group Assignment-Extension Group-Enter).
2. Enter an Extension Group Number that has not been assigned to another mailbox or
Extension Group (this must be a vacant number). Enter the Extensions that are to be
assigned to this group.
3. Enter the Extension Numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group.
4. Return to the Main Program Menu.
5. Type [1-1-1]
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit).
Assign the Extension Group Number to a mailbox. If you used the number "700" for an
Extension Group number, assign the number "700" as a new mailbox. You must also enter
700 as an extension.
Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation.
5.2.9 Interview Service
The subscriber can leave a series of prerecorded questions (up to 10) for the caller in an
Interview Mailbox. As the caller answers questions, answers are recorded in the mailbox. After
a caller records the answers, the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp. When
retrieving the messages, the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions.
There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox:
•
•
Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox
Assign a port as an interview mailbox
Installation Manual
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
To structure an interview mailbox:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-1-1 Mailbox Number-1]
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit-Mailbox Number-Mailbox Setting).
2. Enter the Mailbox Number that is to be assigned an interview mailbox.
This should be the mailbox number of the person who requires the service.
3. At "Interview Mailbox Number "parameter, Enter a Nonexistent Mailbox Number. This will
be the interview mailbox for this subscriber—please make a written note of it for future
reference. It will not show up in Mailbox Listing. If, at a later time, you want to delete the
interview mailbox, press backspace at "Interview Mailbox Number".
4. Exit System Administration Programming.
5. Enter the subscriber’s mailbox and Record the Questions. Call the VPS and Press [#6 ]
then Dial the Mailbox Number assigned to the interview mailbox. From the Main Menu
Press [6-1].
6. Confirm that your questions have been recorded. Call the VPS and Press [#6] and the
Interview Mailbox Number. All your questions should be played.
Note
When using the Custom Service setting, 1 digit can be assigned to go to the
mailbox of the Interview Service. The mailbox owner's message waiting lamp will
go on for normal Voice Mail messages and for message left in the separate
interview mailbox.
5.2.10 Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an
extension number. It transfers the caller to the appropriate extension.
Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by:
•
Automated Attendant Port—This service can be programmed independently for any
or all ports of the VPS. Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant
service.
•
•
Service Access Command—A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by
dialling [#8] during a call.
Via Custom Service—The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit within
a Custom Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Automated Attendant
Service.
Note
When the VPS calls an extension, the VPS waits for a reply. This waiting time is
5.2.11 Department Dialing Service
Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 (one-touch dialling). As a guide
for the caller, the Message Manager should record the Department Dialing Menu—for
example, "Thank you for calling. For overseas travel, press 1. For domestic travel, press 2. For
group travel, press 3".
122
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within Custom Service; after pressing this key,
the caller will hear the Department Dialing Menu.
5.2.12 Operator Service
This service (when enabled) can be accessed via:
•
Voice Mail—Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General
Delivery Mailbox or Operator Service.
•
•
Automated Attendant—Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service.
Custom Service—The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a
Custom Service; after pressing this key, the caller enters Operator Service. Operator
Service can also be the destination of "no-DTMF-input".
Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator. Operator Service
can be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call, it goes to Operator
2. If that fails, the call goes to Operator 3. If that fails, the caller can record a message. At each
stage, there are other options for busy cases and no-answer cases. Operator Service can be
programmed differently for Day, Night, Lunch, or Break Mode. Each operator can be assigned
a mailbox for message-taking.
Installation Manual
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3 SETTING PORTS
5.3 SETTING PORTS
5.3.1 Port Service Menu
Access the Port Service Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 3 (Port/Trunk Service)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Port Service)
Screen output:
Program - Port/Trunk Service - Port Service
Enter the Port Number (1-12) :=
From Program-Port/Trunk Service-Port Service Menu:
Enter the data using the table below as a guide.
Note
In the table below, the sub-parameter "Prompt for Rotary Callers" is underlined. This
sub-parameter can be assigned only when "Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to
"Selective".
Table 5-5
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Company
1-32
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
Greeting No.
S: System
Greeting
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Incoming Call 1. Voice Mail
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Service
2. Auto. Attn.
[Notes]
3. Interview
4. Custom
•
When you specify the Interview Service, one of
Subscriber’s Interview mailbox numbers should also
be specified.
(Auto. Attn.)
•
When you specify the Custom Service, one of 100 (1-
100) Custom Service numbers should also be
specified.
124
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3 SETTING PORTS
Table 5-5
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Incoming Call 1. System
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his choice, provided the Message Manager
has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the
System Administrator has specified a Prompt Selection
Number in "System/User 1/User 2 Prompt Selection
Service
Prompt
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
[Note]
•
If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a
rotary caller or an External Delivery Message receiver
hears when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
Delayed
0-15 s
Specifies the delayed answer time.
Answer Time
(0)
Time Group
No.
1-8
Assigns a Time Group number to the port in Day Mode
setting menu.
(1)
Installation Manual
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Automated Attendant parameters include: Department Dialing, Operator Parameters, and
Alternate Extension.
If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension (such as modem extension),
alternate extension should be assigned (see "Alternate Extension Assignment" in B5.1
5.4.1 Automated Attendant Menu
Access the Automated Attendant Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Setting)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Automated Attendant)
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting Menu
1. Department Dialing
2. Operator's Parameters
3. Alternate Extension
5.4.2 Department Dialing
Department Dialing numbers (1-9) represent department extensions; the VPS will provide
these numbers to the caller in the initial list of prompts.
Return to Program-Service Setting-Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting - Department Dialing Menu
1. Department Dialing No.1 [ ] := 202
2. Department Dialing No.2 [ ] := 204
3. Department Dialing No.3 [ ] := 215
4. Department Dialing No.4 [ ] := 236
5. Department Dialing No.5 [ ] := 207
6. Department Dialing No.6 [ ] := 208
7. Department Dialing No.7 [ ] := 209
8. Department Dialing No.8 [ ] := 210
9. Department Dialing No.9 [ ] := 211
126
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters
If you enable operator service, you must set the following parameters: Operator’s Extension
and Mailbox Number, Coverage Modes, and Message Repeat Cycle.
Operator 1:
The default is set at "0" which coincides with the operator of the PBX. When a caller tries
to leave a message for Operator 1, the message will automatically go to the General
Delivery Mailbox (GDM) by default.
Operators 2 and 3:
For KX-TD500, KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 and KX-TD612, Operators 2 and 3 can be
assigned to a floating number that is assigned to a ring group.
Return to Program-Service Setting-Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting - Operator's Parameters Menu
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
3. Lunch Mode
4. Break Mode
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
Enter the data using the table below as a guide. The table below is for Operator 1 as an
example. Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3.
Table 5-6
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator
Service
1. Disable
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
2. Enable
[Note]
(Enable)
•
All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the
General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator
Service is disabled.
Installation Manual
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Table 5-6
Description
Value Range
Description/Function
(Default)
Operator’s
1-5 Digits
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
Extension
(0)
[Notes]
•
The default setting (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature
and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature.
When using these features, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
•
The extension number must not be assigned
anywhere else (in particular, the extension must
not have a mailbox). Otherwise, you will get an
error message.
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 Digits
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a
message in this mailbox depending upon how the
Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are
set.
(998)
Operator No
Answer Time
10-60 s
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered
within the time set, the VPS will offer other options
as defined by the "No Answer Coverage Mode".
(30)
[Notes]
•
•
This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator
No Answer Time" to 15 s.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
2. No Answer Coverage
3. Call Waiting
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold
4. Disconnect Message
(Hold)
and the Operator 1 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option
specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to
the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 1 when
another call is waiting using the Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
128
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Description/Function
Table 5-6
Description
Value Range
(Default)
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the
"Operator No Answer Time" mode.
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect Message
4. Next Operator
1. Caller Select*—Allows the caller to leave a
message or call another extension.
(Caller Select)
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to
Operator 2.
Message
Repeat Cycle
1-3 Times
Specifies the number of times that the VPS will play
the Automated Attendant top menu.
(3)
*: Note
In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s mailbox
when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
1. No input to Automated Attendant.
2. No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Operation" is set to "C. Operator"
3. No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage" is set to
Installation Manual
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5.1 Mailbox Setting Menu
Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Mailbox Setting)
Program - Mailbox Setting Menu
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 5-7
Value Range
(Default)
Description
Description/Function
The Extension
of the Owner
2-5 Digits
Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the
mailbox. Any valid number can be assigned.
(None)
Owner's First
Name
The Dial by Name feature uses the last name. Both will
be printed on mailbox report.
Up to 16 alphabet
characters
Owner's Last
Name
(None)
Class of
Service No.
COS No.1-62
Defines a set of services available to each subscriber.
The Class of Services 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message
and System Managers. Most subscribers can be placed
in the same COS. Anyone who needs unclaimed
(1)
messages forwarded to a cell phone, beeper (pager) or
another mailbox would need to be in a separate COS.
130
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Table 5-7
Value Range
(Default)
Description
Description/Function
Covering
Extension
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when a
Covering Extension is specified under Incomplete Call
Handling and is the option chosen by the caller.
2-5 Digits
(None)
Interview
Mailbox
Number
Used to permit a mailbox owner to have an interview
mailbox. Must be an unused mailbox.
2-5 Digits
(None)
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
If set to Yes, calls coming to the extension through
Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox without
ringing the extension. (Message Waiting Lamp will not be
turned on.)
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Notification Setting
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
3. 3rd Device
Enter The Number : =
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Installation Manual
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Table 5-8
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Dial Number
Up to 32 digits Assigns a telephone or beeper (pager) number to
consisting of 1-9, Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the
dial number from his telephone.
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note: The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS and
"Type of Device" is set to "Beeper". The proper number
of "Pauses" must be inserted before the callback entry
code.
Type of Device 1. Telephone
Specifies the device to receive notification. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the
Dial Number (above). The subscriber can also specify
the type of device from his telephone.
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Use Mode
1. Not Use
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
telephone.
2. Continuously
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
No. of Retries
0-4 times
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received.
(0)
Busy Delay
Time
2-120 min
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a busy condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
(3)
No Answer
Delay Time
2-120 min
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a no-answer condition is received before making
another notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
(30)
132
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Table 5-8
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Time Frame 1,
2
MON:
TUE:
WED:
THU:
FRI:
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting
Notification service for 1 week for this device.
Note: These parameters are active only when "Use
Mode" is set to "Scheduled".
a.m./p.m.
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
SAT:
SUN:
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Remote Call FWD to CO
1. Telephone No.1 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.1 : =
2. Telephone No.2 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.2 : =
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 5-9
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Telephone
Up to 24 digits Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
Number 1, 2
(With the KX-
TD500)
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an
outside (CO) line.
or
Up to 16 digits
(With other KX-TD
series PBXs)
(None)
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
" ".
Note: This feature is available with DPT Integration
only.
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
Installation Manual
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5.3 Deleting a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Delete
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Are you sure? (Y/ N) : =
5.5.4 Password Reset
To reset a subscriber’s password, go to the Password Reset Menu. "Enter the Mailbox
Number" appears on the screen. Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset. "Enter the
Mailbox Number" appears again. Enter a new number, if you wish to reset more than one
password.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Password Reset
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
5.5.5 Mailbox Listing
This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 4
Program - Mailbox Setting - Mailbox Listing
1: 203
6: 206
11: 211
16: 216
21: ----
26: ----
2: 201
7: 207
12: 212 13: 213
17: 901
22: ----
27: ----
3: 202
8: 208
4: 204
9: 209
14: 214
19: ----
24: ----
29: ----
5: 205
10: 210
15: 215
20: ----
25: ----
30: ----
18: ----
23: ----
28: ----
1001: ---- 1002: ---- 1003: ---- 1004: ---- 1005: ----
1006: ---- 1007: ---- 1008: ---- 1009: ---- 1010: ----
1011: ---- 1012: ---- 1013: ---- 1014: ---- 1015: ----
1016: ---- 1017: ---- 1018: ---- 1019: ---- 1020: ----
1021: ---- 1022: ----
System Manager’s Mailbox No. :999
Message Manager’s Mailbox No. :998
134
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-
digits long.
Installation Manual
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers.
He should explain which service (Voice Mail service, Automated Attendant service, Interview
Service, or a Custom service) will play during the day, and what services will play during night,
lunch, and breaks. He should explain that outside callers are called "non-subscribers" because
they do not have mailboxes. VPS guidance prompts will assist non-subscribers in reaching the
extension or mailbox they need. He should explain the responsibilities of the System
Administrator, the Message Manager, and the System Manager—and how each can be
contacted (phone number and/or mailbox number).
The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers.
Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages. To
check messages (or change mailbox parameters) from an outside telephone, do the following:
As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message, Press code [# 6 ] and then the mailbox
number. For example, a subscriber who has extension 215 and mailbox 215 would press
code [# 6 215]. If the subscriber has a password enabled, the password must be entered.
If the subscriber forgets his password, he should contact either the System Administrator or
the System Manager. Either one can clear the password so that the subscriber can establish
a new password.
Explain the purpose of the General Delivery Mailbox. The Message Manager will periodically
check it, and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber.
Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists. They can be created by the
System Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers. In
particular, senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group
Distribution Lists. Twenty lists can be created, with 20 mailboxes in each list.
Finally, if Custom Service menus are used, subscribers should be encouraged to listen to
these menus often and make suggestions for improvement. Custom service is a very powerful
feature of the Panasonic VPS. Make the most out of this feature.
136
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox
998)
The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system
tasks. Follow the instructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user prompts.
Note
The Message Manager’s mailbox might be 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
6.1.1 Accessing the Message Manager’s Mailbox
1. Enter an Extension Number that is connected to Voice Mail.
You will hear the initial prompt:
Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening.
Welcome to the Voice Processing System...
2. Press [# 6 9 9 8] to access the Message Manager’s mailbox.
You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set:
Enter your password, followed by the pound (hash) sign.
3. Enter the Message Manager’s Password (if programmed). Otherwise, you will not hear
the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
6.1.2 Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To set station call forwarding, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
6.1.3 Company Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,1)
1. Access the Message Manager’s Main Command Menu.
138
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [1] to change the Company Greeting.
4. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
After you record the company greeting, it may be necessary to enter programming through
the terminal and set the company greeting assignment under the Port Settings Menu, Trunk
Service Menu and Holiday Service Menu. This tells the system what company greeting to
play on each port and trunk (outside line) group. A company greeting should be very short.
Example: "Thank you for calling ABC Company". It is not necessary to give any other
instruction within the company greeting because instructions will follow the company
greeting automatically. If Interview Service follows, explanations should be included in the
first question (work for the subscriber who maintains the Interview Service mailbox). If
Custom Service follows, explanations should be included in the first menu (work for the
Message Manager).
6.1.4 Custom Service Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,4)
1. Access the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
4. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Example: Custom Service Greeting: "Thank you for calling ABC Company. If you know your
party’s extension, you may dial it at any time during this message".
Note
This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port. The recording
will be played directly after the call is received.
6.1.5 Customising User Prompts (Enter #6 998,5,6)
The customer may want to enter user prompts in place of the factory-provided system prompts.
To change the user prompts:
1. Access the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [6] to modify the User Prompts.
4. Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or Press [2] to change User Prompt 2.
5. Press [1] to change specified prompts, or Press [2] to change all prompts.
6. Enter the Prompt Number you want to change.
7. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus.
Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process.
Installation Manual
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)
Note
Prompt 645: The system prompt is "This is the General Delivery Mailbox". You can
record User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as, "Thank you for calling ABC company.
We are currently closed, however, if you leave your name and phone number, we
will return your call as quickly as possible".
140
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The following steps complete the basic installation of the VPS. For each mailbox on the
system, a No Answer, Busy, and After Hours Greetings should be recorded, as well as the
Owner’s Name and Password. Please follow the steps below to set up the mailboxes
accordingly.
6.2.1 Recording Personal Greetings
•
•
•
The No Answer Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox during business
hours.
The Busy Greeting plays when the caller is told your line is busy and then elects to leave a
message in your mailbox.
The After Hours Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox when the VPS is
in Night Mode.
1. Dial the Extension Number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ] and Dial the Number of the mailbox for which you
wish to record Personal Greetings.
3. Enter your Password (if programmed), then Press [#].
You are now inside the mailbox.
4. Press [5] for Mailbox Management.
5. Press [1] to change the Personal Greetings.
6. Press [1] again to change the No Answer Greeting.
7. The system will then say: "No Answer Greeting is not recorded. Record greeting at the
tone".
8. State your Greeting at the tone.
Example: "Hi this is Tom. I am away from my desk right now but please leave a message
at the tone and I will return your call as soon as possible".
9. Press [1] when finished.
The system gives the options of reviewing, accepting, or erasing the message.
10. Press [1] to review the greeting.
11. Press [2] to accept the greeting.
12. The system will then play the menu for changing the No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal
Greeting and the After Hours Greeting. Record the Busy Signal Greeting as you did for the
No Answer Greeting.
13. Continue on to the After Hours Greeting and hang up when finished.
6.2.2 Recording the Owner’s Name
1. Dial the Extension Number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ] and Dial the Number of the mailbox to which you
wish to record the Owner’s Name.
Installation Manual
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
3. Enter your Password (if programmed), then Press [#].
You are now inside the mailbox.
4. Press [5] for Mailbox Management.
5. Press [3] to change the Owner’s Name.
6. The system will say: "Owner’s name is not recorded. Record owner’s name at the tone".
7. State the Owner’s First and Last Name at the tone.
8. Press [1] when finished.
The VPS tells you the customer’s name.
9. Press [2] to accept.
TEST THE SYSTEM
Before backing up the system, call each extension to see that each port functions
as it should. Check for proper greetings and call transfers.
142
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
1. Choose the Utility Command. Type [SAVE], then Press ENTER. See screen output
below.
From System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number : = 3
Utility Command
$ SAVE
VPS DISK Data Save ( VPS -> PC : Xmodem )
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4: User Prompts-1
5: User Prompts-2
6: Custom Service Menus
7: Personal Greetings
8: Company Greetings
Select No. : = 2
2. To start, Press [2] and then ENTER.
3. Press RETURN or ENTER.
Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example.
4. Select Receive File from the Transfer Menu.
5. Specify a folder where data is to be saved (if necessary, use "Browse").
6. Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data.
7. Click "Receive".
8. Enter desired filename and click "OK".
The file transfer screen appears and shows download progress. Download time will vary
depending on the communication speed and file sizes.
"SAVE Completed" will appear on the screen when the file has been saved. Continue
saving the other items as needed. It is not necessary to save the "Program" or "System
Prompts" because they are resident on the hard drive and cannot be altered. We do
recommend all other data be saved including User Prompt 1 and User Prompt 2 (if they
have been recorded).
Notes
Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal)
cannot be saved by the above procedure, only Caller ID numbers can be saved.
Installation Manual
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
When the saved Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command, the following
things should be done:
•
For System Caller Name Announcement, the Message Manager re-records
caller names (see "Recording System Caller Names" in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES).
•
For Personal Caller Name Announcement, subscribers re-record caller names
(see 4.12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber’s Guide).
User Prompt files are very large and can take several hours to save. Store saved files
in a safe area.
144
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM
7.1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM
Initialising the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system
parameters to their default settings. Throughout this section, menu selections are indicated as
"System Administration Top Menu-(Selection Number)". This means that the System
Administration Top Menu must first be accessed. On the first menu displayed, make the menu
selection corresponding to the first menu displayed. Repeat this process for each subsequent
menu when additional selection numbers are listed.
To initialise the system, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-4
Note
In the following steps (steps 1 through 6), the output of the VT100 TERMINAL mode
is presented. The output of the ASCII TERMINAL mode is slightly different. For
example, in Step 1, "5: Quick Setup" does not appear when you are in the ASCII
TERMINAL mode. There are other differences, but the basic steps are the same.
1. Go to the System Administration Top Menu
1 : Program
2 : System Reports
3 : Utility command
4 : System Reset/Clear
5 : Quick Setup
SELECT ITEM and PRESS Return-Key
2. Type [4] for System Initialisation.
System Reset/Clear Menu
Mailbox No. Length :3
System Manager's Mailbox No. :999
Message Manager's Mailbox No. :998
Will you change the settings ? (Y/N): =
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the "Mailbox No. Length" might be 2 to
5.
146
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM
3. Type [Y] (this places the VPS in the off-line mode).
System Reset/Clear Menu
Mailbox No. Length :3
System Manager's Mailbox No. :999
Message Manager's Mailbox No. :998
Reset System Parameters : Press
/
4. Type [\].
********************************
* Caution!!!
* Now, System Initialization Starts.
*
*
********************************
Is it all right ? (Y/N):=
5. Type [Y] to start the system resetting.
System Initializing
Wait a moment...
6. When system initialising is complete, the following display will appear:
>
Note
The execution time for System Reset/Clear may differ each time it is performed
because of system capacity and system programmes.
Generally, initialisation will take about 5 min to accomplish.
Installation Manual
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
In the Utility Command Mode, the System Administrator can access the functions described
below by entering the appropriate command at the "$" prompt, and Pressing RETURN.
To select the Utility Commands Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-3
Utility Command (Type 'HELP' for command list.)
$
Table 7-1
OFLN:
ONLN:
PASS:
TIME:
Sets the system to off-line mode
Sets the system to on-line mode
Sets the System Administrator’s password
Sets the system clock, date, and time
Specifies the time reports will be printed
Displays device error log
PSET:
ELOG:
SAVE:
LOAD:
GPRN:
VERS:
CREP:
Stores a backup of the programme or data in the hard disk
Restores a backup of the programme or data to the VPS
Displays all of the VPS parameters
Displays the version of the programme
Displays the keypad assignments, message recording status and the
tree-structure of a Custom service
CCLR:
Clears a Custom service menu access count
MWL:
Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the
message waiting lamp on the extensions
MRL:
Sets the minimum recording length of a message
Displays the user prompt recording status
Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands
Perform a basic setup of your VPS so that you can use it quickly
Line Monitor
MPLT:
HELP:
QSET:
LMON:
PUTD:
WCID:
Displays Touchtone Information
Wait for Caller ID
148
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.1 Off-line Set (OFLN)
Use the OFLN command to turn off the VPS Answer Mode. Set the VPS to Off-Line Mode
before deleting a mailbox, since this operation involves the updating of a large number of
related parameters.
Type OFLN, then Press RETURN. If no VPS ports are in use, the VPS will immediately
suspend the Answer Mode.
$ OFLN
** OFF LINE MODE **
If any VPS port is in use, the VPS will display the following warning:
*** Now line is used!! *** <WAIT>
The following message indicates that the VPS is in the Off-Line Mode.
** OFF LINE MODE **
7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN)
Use the ONLN command to place the VPS in the Answer Mode.
Type ONLN, then Press RETURN.
$ ONLN
** ON LINE MODE **
7.2.3 Set Password (PASS)
Use the PASS command to create, change and clear system passwords. Valid passwords are
created using up to 10 characters; any alphanumeric character, [(space)], [.] and [_] can be
used.
IMPORTANT
•
We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum
protection against hackers.
•
•
Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
Please change the password periodically.
1. Type PASS, then Press RETURN.
$ PASS
1: Administrator Password 2: System Reset/Clear Password :=
2. To create a password or change an existing password, Go to Step 3.
To clear a password, Go to Step 4.
Installation Manual
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
3. To create a password or change an existing password:
a) Type [1] or [2]
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
Note
When you press [2] to change the System Reset/Clear password, you should
type the current (OLD) password before entering a new one.
b) Type the password.
VERIFICATION: =
c) Type the password again for verification.
4. To clear a password:
a) Type [1] or [2].
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
b) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
VERIFICATION : =
c) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
Note
The password entered on the screen will not appear. The VPS does not
distinguish capitals from lower cases.
7.2.4 Set Time (TIME)
Use the TIME command to set the system date and time. A number of system functions require
that the system time and date be set correctly. These functions include message waiting
notification, external message delivery, call-retries-after initial-failure-to-connect, and
automatic deletion of messages.
Time Synchronisation: If you have DPT Integration between the VPS and your PBX (latest
software version), the date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS whenever
the PBX sets the date and time. Also, this transfer occurs whenever DPT Integration is
established.
1. Type TIME, then Press RETURN.
$ TIME
Current time is 12:34, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
2. Type the current time.
Current date is MON 1-JAN-2001
Enter new date (DD-MM-YY) : =
150
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
3. Type the current date. For the year, type the last 2 digits.
Note
Enter the exact time and date. This command cannot be used when either the
System or the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature.
7.2.5 Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET)
Use the PSET command to issue system usage reports (Disk Usage Report, Port Usage
Report, Call Account Report) at a specified time each day. A printer or data terminal must be
connected to the VPS at the RS-232C port for the reports to be printed or displayed.
1. Type PSET, then Press RETURN.
$ PSET
Report Print Out Service [ Disable ]
1 : Enable 2: Disable :=
2. Type [1] to enable this function or Type [2] to disable it.
Enter The Print Out Time (HH:MM, AM/PM) :=
3. Type the time to print the reports.
Note
The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where you see the
following prompt:
>
7.2.6 Error Log Display (ELOG)
Use the ELOG command to diagnose VPS problems. Selection of this command will display
an error log.
COM. Communication error between CPU and DSP
DATA Process error of voice data
MEM. Memory error
PRG. Program error in CPU card
R/W Read/Write error of Hard Disk
Type ELOG, then Press RETURN.
Installation Manual
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
$ ELOG
DEVICE
ERROR
TIME
1. CPU
MEM-GET
14-JUL 2:00 PM
14-JUL 2:00 PM
14-JUL 2:00 PM
14-JUL 2:00 PM
14-JUL 2:00 PM
14-JUL 2:00 PM
2. CLOCK
3. DISK
4. DSP*
5. DSP*
6. CPU
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
SCAN
FIFO
APPLICATION (x)
* = port number (1-12)
Note
The following tables display and explain the errors that the system can identify.
Table 7-2 Device Error Log Indications
Indication
MEM-GET
Meaning
CPU
CPU board software memory acquisition error.
CPU board is short of memory temporarily
because of too much traffic.
CLOCK
DISK
Clock access error. Clock IC is out of order.
Check the hardware.
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
HDD access error. If there is a sector that often
causes errors, check the disk.
xx :
IDE error code
yyyy : read/write error sector number
DSP*
DSP*
SCAN
FIFO
DSP-SCAN error. DSP is out of order. Check the
hardware.
DSP/FIFO error. During the system is handling
calls, there was a temporary problem with the DSP
and FIFO memory.
CPU
APPLICATION (x)
Application error. While the system is handling
calls, temporary application error occurs.
x: port number
* = port number (1-12)
Examples of a terminal display when errors are generated:
Table 7-3 Error Indications at System Startup
Indication
Meaning
ROM checksum error.
ROM ERROR: Sum Error!!
DISK ERROR: Initialize Error!!
DISK ERROR: No System!!
DISK ERROR: Program Load Error!!
HDD initialisation error.
No system HDD present.
Programme could not be loaded from system
HDD.
DISK ERROR: Program Sum Error!!
Checksum error in programme loaded from
system HDD.
152
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
Table 7-3 Error Indications at System Startup
DISK ERROR: System Data Error!!
Error Loading of administrator data from system
HDD.
SYSTEM ERROR: 1
SYSTEM ERROR: 2
SYSTEM ERROR: 3
SYSTEM ERROR: 4
SYSTEM ERROR: 5
SYSTEM ERROR: 6
SYSTEM ERROR: 7
SYSTEM ERROR: 8
SYSTEM ERROR: 9
SYSTEM ERROR: 10
SYSTEM ERROR: 11
SYSTEM ERROR: 12
SYSTEM ERROR: 13
SYSTEM ERROR: 14
No CO lines are active!!
COs are all disabled!!
Administrator data error.
Error loading of report data.
Clock error.
Mailbox data error.
Message data error (1).
Message data error (2).
Error loading of control data.
Error loading of voice prompt data.
Error loading of MWL control data.
Error loading of disk identify data.
Error writing of VBI chain data.
Error writing of BLK chain data.
Error loading of user prompt modify data.
Error loading of Class of Service data.
No Port cards present.
All Ports are malfunctioning.
Ports are malfunctioning for DPT Integration
because telephone lines are disconnected or
Integration with PBX is not set to DPT integration
mode.
DPT Interface Connection is not
Established.
Table 7-4 Error and Warning Indications During System Operation
Indication
Meaning
DISK STORAGE SPACE IS NOW
EXCEEDING
80%...
80 % or more of the HDD voice storage
area is used.
ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error
Error loading of ASCII terminal control
programme.
VT100 program Load Error
Error loading of VT100 control
programme.
7.2.7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE)
All system programming data and voice prompts (8 functional areas) can be saved in separate
data files. To save this data, connect a data terminal to the RS-232C port of the VPS. Save the
files individually. Execute the SAVE command for each data file. It will require several minutes
Installation Manual
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
to execute this command for all the data selected. When performing this operation, always wait
until the process completion indication appears.
WARNING
Never save (back-up) and upload the "Program" without your dealer’s
support.
The memory required to save each data component is indicated below.
1. Program—approximately 2 Mbytes (See Warning above)
2. Parameters—approximately 4.4 Mbyte (System Configuration)
3. System Prompts—approximately 23 Mbytes (Do not save—prompts are
saved as defaults in the drive)
Saving items 4-7 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages.
4. User Prompts-1 (Modified prompts—Modifications to default settings)
5. User Prompts-2 (Modified prompts—Modifications to default settings)
6. Custom Service Menus (Custom service recordings)
7. Personal Greetings (Subscriber greetings)
8. Company Greetings
1. Type SAVE, then Press RETURN.
$ SAVE
VPS Disk Data Save (VPS -> PC : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Selection No. :=
2. Select item to be backed up, then Press RETURN. The size of the file will be displayed.
To start press 'RETURN'
3. Press RETURN.
- - - - - - SAVE Start!!
4. Perform a Standard File Transfer. Set the data terminal to the receiving (Answer) mode
(Xmodem) and specify the backup filename. The specified data will be transmitted to the
data terminal.
Notes
•
The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software
that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be cancelled
by Typing [\] before entering the receiving mode. Once the receiving mode has
been selected, use the cancel command of the communication software being
used.
154
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
•
If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you SAVE at
the maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS
terminal to the same speed.
7.2.8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD)
Use the LOAD command to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS. Execute this
command for each data file.
When performing this operation, always wait until the process completion indication appears
before proceeding.
1. Type LOAD, then Press RETURN.
$ LOAD
VPS Disk Data Load (PC -> VPS : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Selection No.:
2. Select the item to be restored to the hard disk, then Press RETURN.
To start press 'RETURN'
3. Press RETURN.
- - - - - - Load Start!!
When "CCC" appears, the VPS is ready for loading.
4. Set the data terminal to the sending (Call) mode (Xmodem). Then enter the backup
filename. Press ENTER. The backup data will be restored to the hard disk.
5. When the load to the VPS has been completed, power-off and restart the VPS.
Notes
•
The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software
that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be cancelled
by Typing [\] before entering the sending mode. Once the sending mode has been
selected, use the cancel command of the communication software being used.
•
If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you LOAD at
the maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS
terminal to the same speed.
Installation Manual
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.9 Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN)
Use the GRPN command to print all VPS parameter settings (output to screen). Use Ctrl-C at
any time to stop printing.
Type GPRN, then Press RETURN.
$ GPRN
0: All Parameters
1: Mailbox Setting
2: Class of Service Setting
3: Port/Trunk Service Setting
4: Service Setting - Auto Attn. Setting
5: Service Setting - Custom Service Setting
6: Service Setting - Caller ID Call Routing
7: System Parameter Setting - System Group Assignment
8: System Parameter Setting - Time Group Service, Holiday, Daylight Saving Time
9: System Parameter Setting - Prompt Setting
10: System Parameter Setting - System Caller Name Announcement
11: System Parameter Setting - Others
12: Hardware Setting
13: System Reset Clear Parameter
Please select : =
Note
This command is only valid when in the ASCII TERMINAL mode.
7.2.10 Program Version Display (VERS)
Use the VERS command to display the version numbers of the hard disk and main ROM.
Type VERS, then Press RETURN.
$ VERS
V.P.S. PROGRAM VERSION
MAIN DISK : VJ31AD (3.07)
MAIN ROM : VI11AA (1.01)
Note
The numbers are examples only. Your system will show different numbers.
7.2.11 Custom Service Report (CREP)
Use the CREP command to display the Custom Service menu access count, the keypad
assignments, message recording status and the tree-structure of the Custom Service.
Type CREP, Press Space, Enter the Custom Service number (1-100), and Press RETURN.
156
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
Custom [100] (System) (Access: 9 ) (Menu Msg. : None)
| < multilingual pick >
[N]- Xfer Mbx (998)
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- Custom [1] (System) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| <English service>
[N]- Operator
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- A.A. Service
[2 ]- V.M.Service
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
[ ]- Subscriber
[2 ]- Custom [2] (User -1) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| <Spanish service>
[N]- Operator
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- A.A. Service
[2 ]- V.M.Service
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
[ ]- Subscriber
[3 ]- Custom [3] (User -2) (Access: 3) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| < Vietnamese service>
[N]- Operator
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- A.A. Service
[2 ]- V.M.Service
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
[ ]- Exit
[4 ]- Dept Dial
[5 ]- Repeat Menu
[ ]- Exit
[# ]- Main Menu
Custom [100]:
System:
Access: 9:
Indicates that Custom Service No. is "100".
Indicates that "System" prompts are active.
Indicates that the callers have accessed this Custom
Service 9 times. This counter can be cleared. See 7.2.12
Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service
is "None (not recorded)". If menu message is recorded,
"Rec" will appear.
Menu Msg. :None:
[N]-Xfer Mbx (998):
Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox (GDM) if
he dials nothing.
[1]-Custom [1]:
[2]-Custom [2]:
[3]-Custom [3]:
[4]-Dept Dial:
Custom Service 1 will play when the "1" key is pressed.
Custom Service 2 will play when the "2" key is pressed.
Custom Service 3 will play when the "3" key is pressed.
Department Dialling menu will play when the "4" is
pressed.
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR)
Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has
been accessed. This command clears this counter.
Type CCLR, Press Space, and Enter Custom Service Menu (1-100), then Press RETURN.
Installation Manual
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
$ CCLR 20
Custom Menu <20> Access Counter Cleared !!
Note
Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Services.
7.2.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL)
Use the MWL command to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the
Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension. Apply this setting when a PBX other than the
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system is used.
$ MWL
Current Setting of M.W.L. Retry Count is 3
Enter M.W.L. Retry Count (1-3) =
Note
This setting is not valid if "Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message" is set to "Yes".
7.2.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL)
Use the MRL command to specify the minimum message recording length (0-3 s). Messages
shorter than the specified minimum recording length are discarded from the mailbox.
Note
The minimum recording length can only be set using this command.
1. Type MRL, then Press RETURN.
$ MRL
Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2
Enter Minimum Recording Length (0-3) =
2. Type the message length.
7.2.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT)
Use the MPLT command to display the user prompt recording status: recorded, not recorded,
or turned off.
1. Type MPLT, then Press RETURN.
MPLT —> both prompts
MPLT 1 —> User 1 prompts
MPLT 2 —> User 2 prompts
158
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
$ MPLT 1
***List of Registered User Prompt 1 No. ([1], [2], . . ., [931])***
,
,
,
,
1,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
5*,
6,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
*** Total number of Registered = 3 ***
*** Total number of TURN OFF = 1 ***
$
Blank:
The prompt has not been recorded (but the default
[System Prompt] is active)—WILL BE HEARD
The prompt has been recorded—WILL BE HEARD
The prompt has been recorded but is turned off—
WILL NOT BE HEARD
Prompt No.:
Prompt No. with an*:
Note
The "Total Number of Registered" shown at the bottom of the screen includes the
prompts that have been turned off.
7.2.16 Utility Command List (HELP)
Use the HELP command to display the list of all available utility commands.
1. Type HELP, then Press RETURN.
Installation Manual
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
$ HELP
OFLN
ONLN
PASS
: System Off-line
: System On-line
: Password setting
TIME
: Time & Date setting
PSET
: Report Print Out Time setting
ELOG
SAVE
LOAD
GPRN
VERS
CREP [no.]
: Device Error Log Listing
: VPS Program & Date Save (VPS —> PC : Xmodem)
: VPS Program & Date Load (VPS <— PC : Xmodem)
: Parameter Global Printing (only ‘ASCII Terminal’ mode)
: Program Version Check
: Custom Menu Information List
[no.] : Custom Menu No. (1-100)
: Custom Menu Access Counter Clear
[no.] : Custom Menu No. (1-100/0) (0: Clear All)
: MWL Retry count Set (1-3)
CCLR [no.]
MWL
MRL
MPLT [opt]
: Minimum Recording Length Set (0-3)
: Registered User Prompt No. List
[opt] : 1
2
—> User Prompt 1
—> User Prompt 2
None —> User Prompt 1&2
: Quick Setup
: Line Monitor
: DTMF Information Display (Don't leave enabled after
troubleshooting.)
QSET
LMON
PUTD
WCID
$
: Wait Time for Caller ID
7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET)
Use the QSET command initially to perform a basic setup of your VPS when you use your VPS
for the first time or after system initialisation.
Note
Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software.
Type QSET, then Press RETURN.
7.2.18 Circuit Condition Display (LMON)
Use the LMON command to display the circuit condition every 1.5 s. To turn off this command,
enter [\].
The following circuit conditions may be displayed.
"Ready"
: Waiting for a call
"Incoming Call"
"Outgoing Call"
"DSP Reset"
"PT connect"
"Error"
: Answering a call
: Making an outbound call
: Processing DSP reset
: Processing PT connect
: DSP Card is not loaded
160
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
$ LMON
Status
Ready
Ready
Error
Error
Error
Error
Status
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
No.:
1:
No.:
7:
2:
3:
4:
5:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
6:
7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD)
Use the PUTD command to display the touchtones the VPS receives and sends.
In addition to the touchtones, the following will be displayed—the Incoming Call Service (Voice
Mail, Automated Attendant, Custom, and Interview) entered by the caller and the time periods
that the ports are enabled.
Type PUTD. The VPS will remain in this mode until "PUTD" is entered again. The default
setting of this mode for all ports is "OFF".
$ PUTD
Target Port : * * * * * * * * * * * *
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
To change the mode from "PUTD" to "OFF", Type PUTD again.
$ PUTD
Target Port : 0000 0000 0000
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
Note
"*" means "enable" for the port. "0" means "disable" for the port.
To set the mode for only 1 port, Type PUTD and the port number.
$ PUTD 1
Target Port : 0000 0000 000*
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
Installation Manual
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
Sample display:
$ PUTD
Target Port for Debug : * * * * * * * * * * * *
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
[1] DTMF:3
[1] DTMF:8
[1] A.Attend
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:6
[1] Voice Mail
[1] DTMF:1
[1] DTMF:0
[1] DTMF:1
[1] NonSub Svc
[1] * * *
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:9
[1] Thank you
WARNING
"PUTD" is a command originally used when troubleshooting. Do not use this
command for any other purpose. Do not disconnect the RS-232C connection
while the "PUTD" command is enabled. This could cause data overflow.
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID)
Use the WCID command to specify the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must wait for the
Caller ID after the VPS has received the incoming call from the PBX.
If Caller ID is not needed at all, set the waiting time to "0" to accelerate the VPS response to
incoming calls.
Type WCID, then Press RETURN.
$ WCID
WAIT TIME FOR CALLER ID (5 sec) [0-60 sec] : = 0
$
162
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating
status. The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed. The terminal or printer must
be connected to the RS-232C port. (The System Manager is also able to output System
Reports.)
To select the System Reports Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1
System Reports System Report Menu
1. Mailbox Assignments
2. COS Assignments
3. System Service Report
4. Call Account Report
5. Port Usage Report
6. Disk Usage Report
7. Mailbox Usage Report
8. Fax Call Report
Enter the Number : =
The following 4 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the following 4 reports, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2
System Reports System Clear Menu
1. Port Usage Statistics Clear
2. Disk Usage Statistics Clear
3. Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
4. Fax Call Report Clear
Enter the Number : =
7.3.1 Mailbox Assignments
The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the mailbox authorised features
and current parameter settings.
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-
digits long.
Installation Manual
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
To select the Mailbox Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-1
**Mailbox Assignments
28-JUL-2001 11:30 AM **
MBOX
510
Extn. Name (Fir/Lst)
COS
2
2
16
1
1
CExtn
601
602
603
--
--
--
--
IVMBOX
AITrf MN1st
MN2nd
---
Tel
Bep
Tel
---
MN3rd
---
---
---
Bep
---
201
202
203
310
320
410
421
JONE / DELY
SCHE /----------
MAY /-----------
JONE /----------
DAVE /---------
CLUS / ALCC
WHIT / BLUE
621
611
612
-
888
-
-
-
-
X
-
---
Bep
Tel
---
511
512
520
521
522
523
---
21
32
-
---
---
---
---
---
642
-
---
COS:
Class of Service
CExtn:
AlTrf:
MN2nd:
Bep:
Covering Extension
IVMBOX:
Interview Mailbox
All Call Transfer to Mailbox
Message Notification Device 2
Beeper (Pager)
MN1st:
MN3rd:
Tel:
Message Notification Device 1
Message Notification Device 3
Telephone
Note
An ’X’ displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to
"YES".
7.3.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments
The COS (Class of Service) Assignments report provides information concerning all Class of
Service numbers.
To select the COS Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-2
* * COS Assignments
29-JUL-2001 11:30 AM * *
COS GL RtN RtS Ln CaN CaT RO SI SP CW MC DM PG Pr RC DC CN GC CS MN ED (pr) AF (mbox/ dl/ md)
1
2
3
16 10 10
5
3
3
10 10
10 10
10 10
L
L
F
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1
2
3
U1 N N 30
U1 N N 30
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
X
X
X
X
-
U1
U1
-
-
-
-
-----
-----
-----
-
-
-
-
-
-
16
8
7
7
7
7
S
N
N 30
63
64
-
-
30
30
6
6
Un 100 100
100 100
L
L
N
N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
U1 N
U1
N
N
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
-
COS:
Class of Service number
GL:
Personal Greeting Length
164
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
RtN:
Ln:
New Message Retention
RtS:
CaN:
RO:
SP:
Saved Message Retention
Time
Maximum Message
Message Length Time
(Un=Unlimited)
Maximum Message Time
(Un=Unlimited)
Message Scanning with
Information
CaT:
SI:
Message Retrieval Order
(L=LIFO, F=FIFO)
Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting
CW:
PG:
Use Call Waiting on Busy
DM:
Pr:
Direct Mailbox Access
Intercom Paging Group
Prompt Mode (S=System
Prompts, U1=User 1 Prompts,
U2=User 2 Prompts)
RC:
CN:
Remote Call Forward to CO
DC:
Delete Message Confirmation
Maximum number of names for GC:
Personal Caller Name
Play Personal Greeting for
Caller ID
Announcement
CS:
Caller ID Screening
MN:
AF:
Authorisation for Message
Waiting Notification
Authorisation for Auto
Forwarding
(mbox)=Mailbox No
(dl)=Delay Time
ED (pr):
Authorisation for External
Message Delivery (Prompt
Mode)
(SY=System, U1=User 1,
U2=User 2, SL=Selective)
(md)=Forwarding Mode
(M=move, C=copy)
Note
An "X" displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to
"Yes".
7.3.3 System Service Report
The System Service Report provides information about the VPS’s usable ports, trunk (outside
line) groups and Holiday Services. It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port and
each trunk (outside line) group (for Day, Night, Lunch and Break modes), each Holiday
Service, and all incoming and outgoing call services.
To select the System Service Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-3
Installation Manual
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
** System Service Report
9-APR-2001 11:31 AM**
[Night mode]
Grt Srv
[Lunch mode]
Grt Srv
[Break mode]
Grt Srv
Port [Day mode]
Grt Srv
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
A.A.
10 SYS
11 SYS
12 SYS
Trunk [Day mode]
Grt Srv
[Night mode]
Grt Srv
[Lunch mode]
[Break mode]
Grt
Srv
Grt
Srv
[Holiday List]
Name of Holiday
NEW YEAR DAY
SPRING HOLIDAY
Start
1-JAN
24-MAR
End
Grt
15
Srv
C.S. (100)
C.S. (99)
Port
1-12
1-12
Trunk
1-48
1-48
5-APR 16
V.M.:
A.A.:
Voice Mail Service
Automated Attendant
Service
C.S.:
I.S.:
Custom Service
Interview Service
Grt:
Company Greeting
Trunk data (Trunk 1 is shown above) is shown only when 1 (or more) service mode is not
NONE. By default, all trunks for all modes are NONE.
7.3.4 Call Account Report
The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences (for accounting and
billing purposes). Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed
outgoing calls, the telephone numbers called, the call dates, and call duration times. When the
number of outgoing calling sequences reaches 64, the first 10 items are automatically sent to
the terminal. Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system’s
memory.
To select the Call Account Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-4
** Call Account
MBOX:211
MBOX:216
MBOX:214
MBOX:218
MBOX:212
14-NOV-2001 3:40 PM**
DIAL:91111111
DIAL:92222222
DIAL:93333333
DIAL:94444444
DIAL:95555555
4-JAN
7-JAN
7-JAN
8-JAN
8-JAN
7:46
2:26
5:06
9:07
10:24
PM
PM
PM
AM
AM
00:01:32
00:03:32
00:02:45
00:01:15
00:04:51
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-
digits long.
166
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3.5 Port Usage Report
The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port
traffic to be measured. The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and
outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port.
To select the Port Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-5
** Port Usage Report
21-FEB-2001 12:10 PM**
FROM : : 13-FEB-2001 6:08 PM
Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ED
1
4
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
MN
6
3
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rcv
105
8
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
Connect Time
01:43:34
00:03:41
00:00:02
00:00:01
00:01:03
00:00:55
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
9
10
11
12
0
Total
7
14
121
01:49:16
Full-line Time 00:00:00
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
ED: External Delivery MN: Message Notification Rcv: Receive
Full-line Time: The total time that all ports were used simultaneously.
7.3.6 Port Usage Statistics Clear
Clears the Port Usage Report for use again.
To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-1
System Reports - System Report Clear - Port Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear port usage report data? (Y/N) : =
Installation Manual
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Port
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.7 Disk Usage Report
The Disk Usage Report indicates the amount of disk storage used and the disk availability in
minutes. It also presents the following statistics:
•
The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last
clearing of this report.
•
•
The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report.
The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers, and expired and were removed
by the system since the last clearing of this report.
•
The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last
clearing of this report.
To select the Disk Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-6
** Disk Usage Report
29-MAR-2001 1:32 PM**
Drive
1
Avail
1958 min
Used
0min
(%)
(0)
FROM : :
MSGs
29-JAN-2001 1:25 PM
New
0
Cpy
0
Del
0
Exp
0
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
Cpy: Copy (Transfer) Del: Deleted Exp: Expired and Removed
7.3.8 Disk Usage Statistics Clear
The Disk Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Disk Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-2
System Reports - System Report Clear - Disk Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear disk usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Disk
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
168
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3.9 Mailbox Usage Report
The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage of a specific mailbox. It
includes the number of recorded messages, the total amount of outgoing calling time, and
external message, message notification and group message delivery.
To select the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-7
Enter the Range : = 211
Note
Specify the range or the mailbox number. To obtain information on specific
mailboxes from No.200 to No.209, Type [20 ] and Press RETURN, or [200] [,] [209]
and Press RETURN.
** Mailbox Usage Report
4-JAN-2001 7:46 PM**
MBOX:1111 [JONE BLUE]
New
Received
ED
MSGs
MSGs
MSGs
4
6
0
FROM : :
Subscriber Access Time
MBOX Use Time
3-JAN-2001 9:53 AM
00:00:40
00:00:12 of 01:40:00 ( 1% Used)
ED
11
MN
31
IM
20
GM
14
AF
22
Feature Usage
LD
6
00:05:10
Lcl
13
00:10:45
Beep
0
00:00:00
Extn.
28
00:31:21
Outcalling
(Time)
Rcv
42
Del
30
Exp
11
MSG Received
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
MN: Message Notification
GM: Personal/System Group Distribution List
LD: Long distance call (8 digits or more)
Lcl: Local call (less than 8 digits)
Del: Deleted
ED: External Delivery
IM: Interview message
AF: Auto Forwarding
Rcv: Received
Exp: Expired
Note
New MSGs, Received MSGs, and ED MSGs are current status indications. All else are
accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report.
7.3.10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
Installation Manual
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
To clear the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-3
System Reports - System Report Clear - Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
Enter the Range : =
May I clear mailbox usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Mailbox
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.11 Fax Call Report
The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax
signal. It includes the fax data receiving date, the port number used, and the fax transfer status
for up to 64 fax messages.
To select the Fax Call Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-8
** Fax Call Report
[DATE/TIME]
14-NOV-2001 3:50 PM**
[FAX-2]
[PORT]
[FAX-1]
connect
(busy)
11-JAN
11:15 AM
1
2
1
01-MAR 07:58 PM
01-MAR 10:23 AM
(no-ans.)
connect
(busy)
FAX-1: Main facsimile machine
FAX-2: Alternate facsimile machine
connect: Call was answered by the facsimile machine no-ans.: No Answer
7.3.12 Fax Call Statistics Clear
The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-4
170
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
System Reports - System Report Clear - Fax Call Report Clear
May I clear fax call report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Fax Call
Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
Installation Manual
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 7-5
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Nothing is heard from the
VPS when accessing the
VPS.
•
•
Improper connection of jacks.
Bad connection with PBX.
•
•
•
Confirm that you are using the
correct extension number for
the VPS. Ask your System
Administrator.
Check if the jacks of the VPS
are connected to the proper
jacks of the PBX (see in 1.4
Check the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port
Assignment" screen of the KX-
TD500, or System Programme
[126] of other KX-TD series
telephone systems to see if the
programming agrees with the
actual connection.
Unable to utilise some of
the DPT Integration
features, even though DPT
Integration has been
established properly.
•
•
Your PBX cannot support the
feature.
•
Consult your dealer.
The software version of your
PBX is lower than required.
The VPS does not operate. • Bad printed circuit board.
•
•
•
Have the unit repared by your
Panasonic dealer.
•
•
Bad connection with PBX.
Incomplete card insertion.
Check the connection between
the VPS and PBX.
Insert the card firmly into the
card slot.
Dialling is not recognised.
•
•
A pulse phone is being used by • Change to a touch tone phone.
mistake.
•
Adjust the integration mode
properly between the VPS and
your PBX (see "Integration
Improper setting of integration
mode.
172
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Table 7-5
PROBLEM
Line disconnection occurs • Improper setting of the
PROBABLE CAUSE
•
Adjust the transfer sequence to
that of the connected PBX and
reset (see "Operator Transfer
Sequence" and "Extension
Transfer Sequence" in Table B-
while transferring an
outside call.
sequence.
•
•
Improper setting of the flash
(recall) time.
Unable to transfer an
outside call.
Improper setting of the CPC
signal.
•
•
Adjust the flash (recall) time to
that of the connected PBX and
reset (see "Recall Time" in
Adjust the CPC signal to that of
the connected PBX and reset
(see "CPC Signal" in Table B-
Unable to call an outside
party.
•
Improper setting of the outside • Reset the outside (CO) line
call dial procedure.
access sequence of the
connected PBX (see "Dial
MAILBOXES and "Number of
Digits to Access Outside Line"
•
•
Also check "Outgoing Call
Setup Sequence" in Table B-29
When setting a Dial Number for
Device Notification or a
telephone number for External
Message Delivery, keep in mind
the "Important Note" for "Dial
Unable to call an extension. • Improper setting of extension
•
Adjust the extension numbering
plan properly (see "Numbering
numbering plan.
Unable to access the
mailbox.
•
Improper setting of the mailbox • Re-adjust the number of digits
number.
in the mailbox number (see
"Mailbox Number" in Table B-3
in B2 SYSTEM
Installation Manual
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 7-5
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Unable to call Operator 1
•
Improper setting of the
operator extension number.
•
Adjust the operator extension
number to that of the connected
PBX (see "Operator’s
Connected terminal (RS-
232C port) does not
operate.
•
•
Improper connection.
•
•
Be sure you are using a null
modem cable (see 2.8
Improper setting of the RS-
232C parameters.
The terminal and VPS should
have the same parameter
settings for Baud Rate, Word
Bit Length, Parity and Stop Bit
Length (see B7.1 RS-232C
Unable to reconnect when
the line is busy.
•
•
•
•
Improper setting of the busy
signal reconnection procedure.
•
•
•
•
Re-adjust the busy signal
reconnection procedure to that
of the connected PBX (see
"Reconnect Sequence on
Unable to make a no-
response reconnection.
Improper setting of the no-
response reconnection
procedure.
Re-adjust the no-response
reconnection procedure to that
of the connected PBX (see
"Reconnect Sequence on No
Unable to generate a call
waiting tone from the VPS.
Improper setting of sequence.
Adjust the Call Waiting
sequence to that of the
connected PBX (see "Call
Waiting Sequence" in Table B-
Unable to make Intercom
Paging to groups.
Improper setting of the
Intercom Paging access code.
Adjust the Intercom Paging
access code to that of the
connected PBX (see "Paging
Code for Group 1-16" and
"Paging Code for All Groups" in
174
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Table 7-6
Port Cards:
KX-TVP204 (4 digital port expansion card) and KX-TVP102
Dialling Method:
Flash (Recall) Time:
CPC Detection
Type of Line:
Touchtone/Pulse (10/20 pps)
100 ms/300 ms/600 ms/900 ms (programmable)
None/6.5 ms/150 ms/300 ms/450 ms/600 ms (programmable)
Loop start minimum Loop Current: 20 mA
minimum Line Voltage: 7 V DC
minimum Ringing Voltage: 40 V AC
Extension Numbering:
Pause Time:
2 to 5 digits (programmable)
1 s to 9 s (programmable)
Programmable Touchtone sequence
16-bit microprocessor
Message Waiting Lamp:
Main CPU:
Hard Disk Capacity:
Number of Mailboxes:
Approximately 32 h
Maximum 1024 (including System Manager and Message
Manager mailboxes)
Number of Messages:
Maximum 100 per mailbox (programmable)
8 s to 60 s (programmable)
Personal Greeting Message
Length:
Message Retention Time:
Maximum Message Length:
Reports:
1 to 30 days or unlimited (programmable)
1 min to 6 min, or unlimited length (programmable)
Mailbox Assignment, COS (Class of Service) Assignment, System
Service Report, Call Account Report, Port Usage Report, Disk
Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report, FAX Call Report
Connections Telephone Line:
In case of Inband: 2-conductor cable
6
In case of DPT: 4-conductor cable with DPT interface
RS-232C interface port
6
Data Port:
Operating Temperature:
Operating Relative Humidity:
Power Source:
110 V to 240 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Approximately 30 W
Power Consumption:
Dimensions (H
Mass (Weight):
W
D):
470 mm 335 mm 110 mm
Approximately 5.0 kg
(no port expansion card installed at the factory)
Installation Manual
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS
176
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the System
briefly describes each key VPS system feature. In addition, references to specific sections of
this manual and the Subscriber’s Guide are provided in the references column that pertains to
each feature listed. The specific procedure steps required to initiate, access, or utilise each
feature are detailed in these references.
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may
not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For
more information, consult your dealer.
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Alternate Extension A group of extensions, which require a
•
•
•
See "Dialing Parameters" in
Group
different call transfer sequence than normal,
placed into a separate group.
See "Alternate Extension
Assignment" in B5.1 Automated
See "Alternate Extension
Auto Configuration Creates mailboxes by obtaining extension
•
•
•
•
See "System Components" in
(DPT Integration
Only)
numbers from the Panasonic KX-TD series
telephone system.
Also sets the time and date automatically by
obtaining time information from the PBX.
See "Creating Mailboxes" in
See "The length of mailbox
numbers" in 5.1.3 Starting the
•
See "Auto Configuration" in
Auto Forwarding
Moves or copies unretrieved messages from • See "Private Message" in this
one mailbox to another, after a specified
period of time. This service is only available to
subscribers (you cannot auto forward
messages to the System Group Distribution
Lists). Class of Service programming
determines the mailboxes that can use this
feature. Messages marked as "private"
cannot be forwarded. Also, a message is
never forwarded to the original sender of the
message.
Table.
•
See "Authorization for Auto
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
•
•
See "Auto Forwarding" in
178
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Automated
Attendant
Answers incoming calls and routes those
calls to the desired extension. The service
can be assigned to all of Day, Night, Lunch,
and Break time periods. Available for both
Port and Trunk Services.
•
•
•
•
See 5.2.10 Automated
See 5.4 AUTOMATED
See "Automated Attendant" in
Broadcasting
Messages
Permits the System Manager to deliver the
same message to all VPS subscribers at the
same time.
•
See "Delivering Messages to All
Mailboxes (Broadcasting
Messages)" in C8 DELIVERING
This feature is only available to the System
Manager.
Busy Coverage
Mode
Specifies how the VPS will handle calls to the • See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
operator when the line is busy. The Busy
Coverage options that are available include:
Hold, No Answer Coverage, Call Waiting, and
Disconnect Message.
•
See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
Call Services
Include a series of both incoming and
outgoing call services.
•
•
See "Port Service Setting" in
Incoming Call Services: Automated
Attendant Service, Voice Mail Service,
Interview Service, Custom Service.
Outgoing Call Services: Message Waiting
Notification, and External Message Delivery.
See "Incoming Call Service" in
Menu.
•
•
See "Incoming Call Service" in
See "Incoming Call Service
Call Transfer Status Permits subscribers to specify how the VPS
will handle calls to their individual extensions.
Call Transfer Status options include: Call
Screening, Call Blocking, Intercom Paging,
and Calling a Beeper (Pager).
•
•
See "Calling a Beeper (Pager)"
and "Intercom Paging (DPT
Integration Only)" in this Table.
See "Call Transfer" in
•
See 4.1 Call Transfer Status in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
Installation Manual
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Callback Number
Entry
in several different ways depending upon
which option is programmed into the VPS.
The VPS can forward the callback number to
a beeper (pager).
•
See "Beeper Callback No. Entry
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
•
•
See "Other Parameters-
Message Waiting Notification" in
Caller ID Call
Routing
(DPT Integration
Only)
to 120 Caller ID numbers and program the
route for the calls from these assigned
numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
(System Group Distribution List included) or
Custom Service.
•
•
See "Caller ID Call Routing" in
The Company Greetings will not play when
calls are routed as programmed by this
feature.
Caller ID Screening Allows extension users to hear prerecorded
•
See "Caller Name
(DPT Integration
Only)
caller names when calls from assigned
numbers are transferred from the VPS to the
extension users.
Announcement—Personal" and
"Caller Name Announcement—
System" in this Table.
Caller Name
Announcement—
Personal
(DPT Integration
Only)
Allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller
ID numbers and record a caller name for each
Caller ID number from their telephone. The
caller name is announced when: (1)
subscribers listen to the messages from
assigned numbers left in their mailboxes, (2)
the VPS transfers calls from assigned
numbers to the subscribers (Caller ID
Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the
subscribers by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
•
•
See "Number of CIDs for Caller
Name Announcement" and
"Caller ID Screening" in Table B-
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
•
•
See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
•
See 4.12 Personal Caller Name
Announcement in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
180
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Caller Name
Announcement—
System
(DPT Integration
Only)
to 120 Caller ID numbers. Each Caller ID
number can have a caller name recorded by
the Message Manager. The caller name is
announced when: (1) extension users listen
to the messages from assigned numbers left
in their mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls
from assigned numbers to the subscribers
(Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages
the subscribers by intercom (Intercom
Paging).
•
See "Caller ID Screening" in
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
•
•
•
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
See "Recording System Caller
Names" in D6 RECORDING
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
•
See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
Installation Manual
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Calling a Beeper
(Pager)
Allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper • See "Dial Number" and "Type of
(pager) when he has message(s). If the
beeper (pager) has a display, it is possible to
send to it a callback number. The callback
number can be recorded when a caller leaves
a message. If the caller does not leave a
callback number, the System Callback No., or
the caller’s number if it is received through a
telephone company’s Caller ID service, will
be sent instead.
•
See "Authorization for Message
Notification" and "Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode" in
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
To utilise this feature, follow the procedure
below.
•
•
See "System Callback Number"
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
COS No.(1-63).
Select "Yes" in the Authorization for Message
Notification parameter. Make 1 selection from
the available options in the Beeper Callback
No. Entry Mode parameter.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-1-1-Mailbox No.-Y-2-Device No.(1-3)
(Program-MailboxSetting-Enter/Edit-Mailbox
No. Entry-Do you want to edit this mailbox?-
Notification Setting-Device No. Entry).
For the Dial Number parameter: enter your
PBX’s line access code before the beeper
(pager) number for dialing outward; enter an
X after the beeper (pager) number. (The X is
for the caller to enter his number as the
callback number which will later appear on
your beeper [pager].) Finally, select "Beeper"
in the Type of Device parameter.
Class of Service
(COS)
There are 62 COS levels for subscribers.
•
•
COS 63 is for the Message Manager and
COS 64 is for the System Manager.
See B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
Either the System Administrator (using a
personal computer) or the System Manager
(using a telephone) can change COS
assignments.
•
•
See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
182
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
all incoming callers and provide relevant
information. This feature allows the use of up
to 32 different greetings for each individual
Time Service period (Day, Night, Lunch and
Break) as well as holidays*. Available for both
Port and Trunk services.
•
•
See C6 CHANGING THE
See "Company Greeting No." in
Note: The System Manager can change the
Company Greeting setting by simply calling
the VPS.
•
See "Company Greeting No." in
*: Only the System Administrator can assign
specific greetings for holidays.
•
•
See D6 RECORDING
See "Company Greeting" in
Company Name
Is used by External Message Delivery
Service when the intended receiver enters
the password incorrectly 3 times. The VPS
announces the Company Name so that the
receiver realises what company placed the
call to him.
•
•
See D6 RECORDING
See "Company Name" in
•
•
See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
Covering Extension Forwards calls to a second extension when
the first extension’s subscriber is not
See "Covering Extension" in
available to take the call. The caller can also
access the Covering Extension by pressing
[0] while a Personal Greeting is being played,
or while leaving a message.
•
•
See "Covering Extension" in
See 4.2 Covering Extension in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
Installation Manual
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Custom Service
entering numbers or symbols through the
telephone keypad.
•
•
•
The Message Manager can record up to 100
Custom Service menus. These menus can be
recorded in various foreign languages, and
help guide outside callers to the desired
extension, mailbox, System Group
Distribution List, Department Dialling menu,
operator, fax machine, etc.
•
•
See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in D6
Note: Callers cannot jump between Custom
Service menus more than 8 times.
•
See "Custom Service Setting" in
Daylight Saving
Time Assignment
start and end of Daylight Saving Time.
Delete Message
Confirmation
Requests confirmation from mailbox owner
before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
•
See "Delete Message
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
COS (Class of Service) settings.
•
Department Dialing Is a speed-dialling feature that permits the
caller to quickly reach the desired extension
by dialling a 1 digit number either during or
after the playing of the Department Dialling
message.
•
•
See "Department Dialing" in
•
See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in D6
•
•
See "Department Dialling" in
Dialing by Name
Allows the caller to reach the intended
mailbox/extension (when the number is not
known) by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of
the mailbox owner’s last name. The VPS
identifies all subscribers with that letter
combination and states each name for the
caller. The caller selects the desired
subscriber by entering the appropriate
number.
See "Owner Last Name" in
184
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Direct Mailbox
Access
(DPT Integration
Only)
Allows subscribers to call the VPS and
access their mailbox without entering the
mailbox number.
•
•
See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
•
•
See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
DPT Integration
Is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
transmitted between the VPS and PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Remote Call Forwarding Set, Auto
•
•
See "Voice Mail" in 1.3.3 Which
See 1.4 VOICE MAIL
Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing, Caller
Name Announcement (System/Personal),
Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging, Live
Call Screening, Personal Greeting for Caller
ID, Time Synchronisation with PBX, Two-
Way Record and Two-Way Transfer.
•
•
•
See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
Note: Depending on the model and/or the
software version of the connected PBX, you
may not be able to utilise some of the features
available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, consult your dealer.
•
See "DPT Integration" in
Extension Group
Places several extensions into the same
mailbox to share information using an
Extension Group. The System Administrator
must establish this list. The VPS can maintain
up to 20 lists with a maximum of 20 entries on
each.
•
•
See "System Group
Assignment-Extension Group"
Extension
Numbering Plan
Permits the VPS to recognise an extension
number as valid.
•
See "Other Parameters-
Extension Numbering Plan" in
Installation Manual
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
External Message
Delivery List
Allows a subscriber to send a message to
outside parties and/or extensions with a
single operation. One subscriber can
maintain up to 2 lists with a maximum of 8
entries on each.
•
•
See "External Message Delivery
Service" in this Table.
See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorised for
the subscriber’s COS.
•
•
See 3.3 Setting up an External
Message Delivery List in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
External Message
Delivery Service
Allows a subscriber to send a message to
several subscribers and non-subscribers
(including outside parties) at a specified time
(or immediately). This feature also permits
the receiver to reply to the message without
having to specify the mailbox number.
See "The Extension of the
•
See "Authorization for External
Message Delivery" in Table B-7
in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
If the sender wishes, he can require the
receiver to enter a 4-digit password to receive
the sender’s message. If the receiver enters
the password incorrectly 3 times, the VPS: (1)
plays the Company Name (if it has been
recorded), (2) plays the Company’s
Telephone Number (if registered), and (3)
plays the sender’s extension (if both the
Company’s Telephone Number and the
Extension of the Owner have been
•
See "Other Parameters-
External Message Delivery" in
•
•
See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
registered). With this information, the receiver
can possibly track down the message even if
he does not remember the password.
COS programming determines whether this
feature can be used or not.
•
•
•
See 3.4 Sending External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 3.6 Replying to External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
186
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
External Message
Delivery Status
Allows the subscriber to check the status of
undelivered and pending external delivery
messages.
•
•
See "External Message Delivery
Service" in this Table.
See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorised for
the subscriber’s COS.
•
•
See 3.7 Checking and Setting
External Message Delivery
Status in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
Fax Management
Allows the VPS to automatically route an
incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine.
Up to 2 fax machines can be assigned using
this feature. Outside callers can also reach
the fax machine via Custom Service
selection, if programmed.
See "Fax Management (1-5-7-
8)" in 5.2.2 Custom Service
•
•
A special mailbox can be assigned to the Fax
Manager. In this way, the VPS can notify the
Fax Manager of the status of faxes.
•
See "Other Parameters-Fax
Management" in B6.7 Other
Group Distribution
Allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a • See "Group Distribution List—
List—Personal
message to several mailboxes using a Group
Distribution List. This list is established by the
subscriber. Each subscriber can maintain a
maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on
each list.
System" in this Table.
•
See "Personal Group
•
•
•
See 4.5 Personal Group
Distribution Lists in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.6 Deleting Group
Distribution Members in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.7 Deleting Group
Distribution List Names in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
Group Distribution
List—System
Allows a subscriber to send a message to
several mailboxes using a Group Distribution
List. Also allows a caller to record a message
into all mailboxes within the list. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
maximum of 20 entries on each.
•
See "System Group
Assignment-Mailbox Group" in
•
•
See "System Group Distribution
Installation Manual
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Hold
Provides the caller with the option of
temporarily holding when the line is busy. The
VPS automatically recalls the extension after
a specified period of time. When several
callers are holding for the same extension,
callers are connected in the order in which
they originally called.
•
•
See "Other Parameters-Call
Hold" in B6.7 Other Parameters.
Holiday Service
Permits the VPS to record, store, and play
several different holiday greetings. Up to 20
Holiday Service settings can be programmed.
It is possible to either specify a single day or
a range of days on which to enable the
Holiday Service setting.
Note: Holidays cannot overlap.
Inband Integration
send information to the VPS using
Touchtones. Inband integration is
characterised as Voice Mail Integration and
Touchtone Integration. Voice Mail Integration
works with the Call Forwarding Feature of the
PBX to permit a caller to leave a message
when the mailbox number of the called
extension is not known. Touchtone
Integration works with the Automated
Attendant Service to enable the VPS to
immediately recognise the state of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) and improve
its call handling performance.
•
•
•
•
•
See Section 3 INTEGRATING
See "Inband Signalling" in
Incomplete Call
Handling Service
Allows the subscriber to offer callers several • See "Calling a Beeper (Pager)"
service options when the extension is busy or
there is no answer: Leaving a Message,
Transfer to Covering Extension, Returning to
the Automated Attendant Top Menu,
Intercom Paging, Calling a Beeper (Pager),
or Calling Operators.
and "Intercom Paging (DPT
Integration Only)" in this Table.
•
•
See "Incomplete Call Handling
See 4.3 Incomplete Call
Handling Status in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
188
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Intercom Paging
(DPT Integration
Only)
Permits callers to page subscribers by PBX
paging (there are different kinds of PBX
paging, and these can be specified by VPS
programming) when the subscribers have set
Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when the
subscribers have set Intercom Paging for
Incomplete Call Handling. The caller is briefly
placed on hold while the VPS announces the
page and until the subscriber answers the
page. The subscriber can answer the page
from any extension using the paging answer
code; this code is specified in the PBX User
Manual. For a Caller ID Caller, if his name
has been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature, the name will be
announced at the end of the page. If the
caller’s name has been recorded for both the
System and Personal Caller Name
•
•
See "Intercom Paging (1-5-7-7)"
•
See "Intercom Paging Group" in
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
•
•
See "Other Parameters-
Intercom Paging Parameter" in
See "Intercom Paging" in
Announcement, the VPS will use the
personal caller name.
To utilise this feature, follow the procedure
below.
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
COS No.(1-62). Select an Intercom Paging
Group (1-17) for this COS. If set to Group 17,
the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-5-7-7 (Program-System Parameter
Setting-Others-Intercom Paging
Parameters). Adjust the "No Answer Time for
Intercom Paging" to your preference (the
default is 5 s). For the Intercom Paging Group
you selected in Step 1, set the Intercom
Paging access code in "Paging Code for
Group 1-16" and "Paging Code for All
Groups".
Installation Manual
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Interview Service
Plays a set of recorded questions when a
caller accesses the service. The caller is
provided an opportunity to answer each
question after it has been asked. Subscribers
are able to record questions directly into their
own Interview Mailbox.
•
•
See "Interview Mailbox Number"
•
•
See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
See "Interview Service" in
•
See 4.9 Interview Mailbox in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
190
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Live Call Screening Permits the subscriber to monitor incoming
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
•
(DPT Integration
Only)
calls as messages are being recorded. The
subscriber has the option of answering calls
while monitoring or allowing the message to
be recorded without interruption. There are
two modes in this feature: Hands-free and
Private.
Hands-free permits the subscriber to hear the
caller through the telephone’s speaker and
answer the call by lifting the handset. The
Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the
telephone handset to be lifted before the
message can be monitored. Two-way
communication is established by pressing the
feature button.
•
Private/Hands-Free Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
See "Message Cancel for Live
B3 SYSTEM
COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
•
•
See "Live Call Screening" in
•
See 4.13 Live Call Screening in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
Installation Manual
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Logical Extension
(All Calls Transfer to directly into its mailbox. This feature is used
Mailbox)
Is an extension that always receives calls
•
See "All Calls Transfer to
by subscribers that are often unavailable or
that do not have a telephone.
•
•
See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
See "Logical Extension" in
Mailbox
are stored. Several mailbox options exist:
Subscriber Mailbox, Interview Mailbox,
System Manager’s Mailbox, and Message
Manager’s Mailbox (General Delivery
Mailbox).
•
•
•
•
•
See B2 SYSTEM
•
•
•
See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
Message Delivery, Allows the VPS to automatically deliver a
See "Group Distribution List—
Personal", "Group Distribution
List—System" and "Message
Delivery Status" in this Table.
Internal
single message to multiple mailboxes.
Message Delivery
Status
Allows a subscriber to check the status of
messages that have been sent. The sending
subscriber has the option of cancelling any of
the messages after checking their status. If a
recorded message has not been received,
the VPS will voice report the following: the
message’s destination mailbox number and
its contents.
•
See 3.2 Checking Mailbox
Distribution in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
Message delivery status information is
automatically deleted after the message has
been received by the subscriber, or when the
subscriber cancels the delivery, or when a
new message arrives after 84 delivery status
messages have been stored in the
subscriber’s mailbox (the oldest status
message is always deleted first).
192
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Message Reception Allows incoming calls to be received by either • See "Interview Service" and
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Mode
a subscriber’s regular or interview mailbox.
"Logical Extension (All Calls
Transfer to Mailbox)" in this
Table.
This mode is effective for: (1) Incomplete Call
Handling Service (when the subscriber’s line
is busy, or he cannot take the call, or when he • See "All Calls Transfer to
has enabled Call Blocking), and (2) when the
transfer destination of calls is set to a Logical
Extension.
•
See 4.4 Message Reception
Mode in the Subscriber’s Guide.
Message Scan
Permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of • See "Message Scanning with
each message. The subscriber can replay the
previous message, play the next message, or
play the entire message.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
•
•
See "Scanning Messages" in
•
See 2.1 Receiving Messages in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
Message Transfer
Allows the subscriber to transfer messages to • See "Transferring Messages" in
other mailboxes after playing. The subscriber
can also add a personal comment at the
beginning of the message to be transferred if
desired.
•
•
See "Message Transfer" in
One or more individual mailboxes can be
specified for message transfer. Messages
can also be transferred using either the
System or Personal Group Distribution Lists.
See 2.3 Message Transfer in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
Installation Manual
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Message Waiting
Automatically notifies the subscriber/
•
See "Message Waiting
Notification from an SLT" in
Notification—Device Message Manager of the reception of new
message(s) by calling either a specified
telephone or beeper (pager) number. The
message will automatically play when the
subscriber/Message Manager answers a call
to the telephone. When a beeper (pager) is
called, the subscriber/Message Manager
must call the VPS and access the message
from the mailbox. Notification can be
•
•
See "Notification Setting" in B2
See "Authorization for Message
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
scheduled either on or off for a maximum of 2
times during any 24 h period.
The subscriber/Message Manager can
program a maximum of 3 telephones or
beepers (pagers) in sequence. The VPS will
redial the number or number sequence for a
specified number of times until answered.
•
See "Other Parameters-
Message Waiting Notification" in
•
•
Notification is terminated when the
subscriber/Message Manager has received
the message, when the last number has been
called a specified number of times, or at the
completion of the programmed time period.
•
•
See "Message Waiting
See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
194
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Message Waiting
Notification—Lamp waiting lamp on the subscriber’s or the
Message Manager’s telephone when there
are unplayed messages waiting in the
mailbox.
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Automatically illuminates the message
•
See "Message Waiting
Notification from an SLT" in
•
•
Note: The extension assigned for Operator 1
in the Day Mode is the Message Manager’s
telephone. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this feature.
When using this feature, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
See "MWL Notification for
Unreceived Message" in Table
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
•
See "Other Parameters-
Message Waiting Notification" in
•
•
•
•
See "Message Waiting Lamp" in
See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
Multilingual Service Permits up to 3 languages to be used for
prompt options. If the "Selective" mode is
selected, callers are able to choose their
desired language.
•
•
•
See "Incoming Call Service
See "System/User 1/User 2
Selection Number" in Table B-
See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" and "Recording
User Prompts" in D6
•
See "Multilingual Selection
Menu" in GLOSSARY.
Installation Manual
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
No Answer
Specifies how the calls will be handled when • See "No Answer Coverage
Coverage Mode
Operator 1, 2 and/or 3 do not answer them
within the specified "Operator No Answer
Time". There are 4 options:
•
See "No Answer Coverage
*1
Caller Select —caller may leave a message
or call another extension.
*1
Leave Message —caller may leave a
message in Operators’ mailbox.
*1
Disconnect Message —caller is
disconnected from the VPS after hearing
"Thank you for calling."
*2
Next Operator —caller is transferred to the
next operator (Operator 2 or 3) extension.
*1: Assignable for Operator 1, 2 and 3
*2: Assignable for Operator 1 and 2
Operator Service
Permits callers to request a live operator by
pressing [0] on the telephone keypad. Up to 3
operators can be specified to receive calls in
the Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
•
•
See "Operator’s Parameters" in
•
See "Operator’s Extensions" in
D4 CUSTOMISING THE
Password
Administration
Allows the System Administrator or System
Manager to clear a subscriber password (so
that a new one can be assigned).
•
•
See "Deleting a Mailbox
Password" in C2 SETTING UP
PBX Integration
an integrated unit. Two integration options
are available: Inband Integration and DPT
Integration.
•
See Section 3 INTEGRATING
•
See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TD DIGITAL
196
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Personal Greeting
for Caller ID
(DPT Integration
Only)
Permits subscribers to record up to 4
personal greetings for calls from pre-
assigned Caller ID numbers. Each greeting
supports up to 8 caller ID numbers.
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
COS (Class of Service) settings.
•
•
See "Personal Greeting Length"
and "Personal Greeting for CID"
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
•
•
See "Personal Greeting for
Caller ID" in GLOSSARY.
•
•
See 4.10 Recording Personal
Greetings for Caller ID in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.11 Assigning Caller ID
Numbers for Personal Greeting
for Caller ID in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
3 personal message greetings:
No Answer—Plays when unavailable to
answer the call during business hours.
•
See "Personal Greeting Length"
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
Busy Signal—Plays whenever the line is
busy.
After Hours—Plays when the VPS is in the
Night Mode.
•
•
See "Personal Greetings" in
The No Answer Greeting will also play:
• when the caller accesses the mailbox
directly.
•
•
See 1.2 Recording Personal
Greetings in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
• when the Busy Signal or the After Hours
Greeting has not been recorded.
Play System Prompt Allows the "Guidance for Recording"
See "Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting" in Table B-7
in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
After Personal
Greeting
message to be played for the caller after the
"Personal Greeting". The "Guidance for
Recording" message instructs the caller how
to terminate the call, access more features,
and re-record the message.
•
Installation Manual
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Port Service
Allows assignment of call services to each
port.
•
•
See B4 SYSTEM
The incoming call service determines which
service is used when answering incoming
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
Private Message
Allows a subscriber and the System Manager • See "Delivering Messages to
to specify a message as "Private" when
sending it to other subscribers, the Message
Manager and/or the System Manager. A
message specified as "Private" cannot be
transferred. It is also possible to specify
messages recorded in the Voice Mail Service
as "Private".
Specified Mailboxes" in C8
•
•
•
See "Private Message" in
See 3.1 Delivering Messages to
Other Subscribers in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
Receive Message
Allows subscribers to access messages left
in their mailboxes. Three options are
available to subscribers:
See "Message Transfer" and
"Message Scan" in this Table.
Reply to Message Sender—permits
subscribers to reply to the message sender
without specifying the extension.
•
•
See 2.1 Receiving Messages in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
See 2.2 Replying to Messages
in the Subscriber’s Guide.
Message Transfer—permits subscribers to
transfer their messages to other mailboxes.
Message Scan—permits subscribers to
listen to the first 4 s of each message.
198
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Remote Call
Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration
only)
Allows a subscriber and the Message
Manager to program his extension from a
remote location to forward various types of
calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone.
•
•
See "Remote Call Forward to
CO Setting" in B2 SYSTEM
There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number.
FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number when the line is
busy.
FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming
calls to a desired extension number when
there is no answer.
FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all
incoming calls to a desired extension number
when the line is busy or there is no answer.
FWD to CO*—Forward all incoming calls to
the Telephone number 1 or 2 (programmed in
the Mailbox Setting), or to any other number.
FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding setting.
•
See "Remote Call Forward to
in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
•
•
•
See D7 REMOTE CALL
See "Remote Call Forwarding
Set" in GLOSSARY.
•
See 4.16 Remote Call
Forwarding Set in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
*: Must be enabled in the COS (Class of
Service) settings to be utilised.
With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is
disabled. To enable VPS Remote Call
Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for example,
must be programmed properly. For the
COS of the extensions whose calls are to
be forwarded to an outside (CO) line,
enable the following: [504] Call Forward to
Outside Line.
Note: The extension assigned for Operator 1
in the Day Mode is the Message Manager’s
extension. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this feature.
When using this feature, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
Rotary Telephone
Service
Provides guidance to callers using rotary
telephone systems or when several seconds
pass without anything being entered by the
caller.
•
•
See "Other Parameters-Rotary
Telephone Service" in B6.7
See "Rotary Telephone" in
Installation Manual
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Service Access
Commands
Allow the caller to directly access several
standard features.
•
•
(0) to repeat the Help Menu or call the
operator
•
See 1.5 Service Access
Commands in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
( ) to return to previous menu
(#) (1) to dial by name
(#) (3) Department Dialling
(#) (5) Login
(#) (6) Voice Mail Service
(#) (7) to restart (Subscriber’s main menu)
(#) (8) to call transfer
(#) (9) to exit
Service Mode
Allows the System Administrator or the
System Manager to change the call handling
method that is programmed for each Time
Group 1-8.
•
•
See "Time Group" and "Time
Service" in this Table.
See "Time Group Service-
Service Mode" in B6.2 Time
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it
is retained unless the System Manager or
System Administrator changes it again, even
after the power turns off.
•
There are 6 Service Modes available:
Automatic Mode—Operates according to
the setting in Time Service.
Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day
Mode.
Manual Night Mode—Operates only in Night
Mode.
Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in
Lunch Mode.
Manual Break Mode—Operates only in
Break Mode.
PBX Control Mode—Operation changes
depending on PBX time period (DPT
Integration only).
200
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Special Feature
Authorisation
Permits mailbox owners to use the following
special features: Remote Call Forward to CO,
Delete Message Confirmation, Message
Waiting Notification, External Message
Delivery, and Auto Forwarding.
•
See "Remote Call Forward to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", "Authorization for
Message Notification",
"Authorization for External
Message Delivery", and
"Authorization for Auto
But the Message Manager can only utilise the
following features: Remote Call Forward to
CO, Delete Message Confirmation, and
Message Waiting Notification; and the
System Manager can only utilise the Delete
Message Confirmation feature.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
•
•
See "Remote Call Forward to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", and
"Authorization for Message
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
System Clock
to be made for proper VPS operation.
•
•
System Reports
Eight System Reports are available to the
System Administrator and System Manager
to monitor VPS operating status. These
reports include: Mailbox Assignments, COS
Assignments, System Service Report, Call
Account Report, Port Usage Report, Disk
Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report, and
the Fax Call Report.
•
•
•
See "System Report" in
Time Group
Is a time frame in which Day, Night, Lunch
and Break time periods can be programmed.
It is possible to assign up to 8 different Time
Groups.
It is necessary to assign a specific Time
Group for use in both Port and Trunk Services
(in the Day Mode setting menu).
•
•
See "Service Mode" and "Time
Service" in this table.
See "Time Group No." in Table
•
•
See C5 CHANGING THE
Installation Manual
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Time Service
Is a timer function that initiates the
appropriate call handling method depending
on the time of day: Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Service periods.
Each Time Group (1-8) can have different
Time Service setting.
•
•
•
See "Service Mode" and "Time
Group" in this table.
See "Time Service (1-5-2-2)" in
See "Time Group Service-Time
Service" in B6.2 Time Group
Time
Synchronisation
(DPT Integration
only)
PBX sets a new date and time, or when DPT
Integration is established. The date and time
are automatically sent from the PBX to the
VPS.
•
•
See "Time Synchronisation" in
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
(DPT Integration
only)
Allows call services to be assigned to each
trunk (outside line) group.
•
•
See B4 SYSTEM
The incoming call service determines which
service is used when answering incoming
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
Two-Way Recording Permits a subscriber to record two-way
•
•
(DPT Integration
only)
conversations into his mailbox.
•
•
•
•
See "Two-Way Recording" in
•
See 4.14 Recording a Two-Way
Conversation in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
202
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Two-Way Transfer Permits a subscriber to record two-way
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
•
•
(DPT Integration
only)
conversations into another person’s mailbox.
•
•
•
•
See "Two-Way Transfer" in
•
See 4.14 Recording a Two-Way
Conversation in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
Unlimited Message Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way
•
•
See "Two-Way Recording" and
"Two-Way Transfer" in this
table.
Length
conversations of unlimited length into his or
another person’s mailbox (Two-Way
Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The
maximum recording time for other messages
will automatically be set to 6 min.
See "Message Length" in Table
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
To allow unlimited recording time, the
"Message Length" parameter must be set to
"0: Unlimited" in the COS (Class of Service)
settings.
•
•
See "Unlimited Message
Length" in GLOSSARY.
Utility Commands
Allow the System Administrator to access
critical VPS functions.
•
Voice Mail Service Permits a caller/non-subscriber to leave a
message in any mailbox.
•
•
See B4 SYSTEM
•
See "Voice Mail" in
Installation Manual
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Voice Prompts
Are announcements that instruct the caller.
•
•
There are 3 kinds of voice prompts:
See " Prompt Mode" in Table B-
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
(1) System Prompts (recorded at the factory
in English),
(2) User 1 Prompts (not recorded), and
(3) User 2 Prompts (recorded at the factory
in Spanish).
•
•
•
•
See "Recording User Prompts"
in D6 RECORDING
See "Voice Prompt" in
204
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
Use either a VT100 or compatible terminal or other RS-232C terminals (ASCII Terminals) to
perform System Administration, which includes the setting and changing of system
parameters. This can be a personal computer with emulation software.
Keyboard Use
VT100 or Compatible Terminals
When using a VT100 or compatible terminal, perform either of the following steps to choose
options from screen menus:
•
•
Move the cursor to the desired listed option and Press RETURN.
Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN.
Table B-1
KEY
FUNCTIONS
Moves the cursor up one line.
Moves the cursor down one line.
Moves the cursor to the right.
Moves the cursor to the left.
(1)-(9)
(RETURN)
(\)
Typing any number 1 through 9 will select the
corresponding option for that number.
Also the ENTER key. Selects the number
entered.
Exits the current screen and returns to the
previous step within the menu.
(Back space)
Used to correct any mis-typed entry.
Other RS-232C Terminals (ASCII Terminals)
When using RS-232C Terminals, Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN
to choose menu options.
Table B-2
KEY
FUNCTIONS
(1)-(9), then (RETURN) Typing any number 1 through 9 will select
the corresponding option for that number.
Pressing RETURN will select the number
entered.
(\)
Exits the current screen and returns to the
previous step within the menu.
206
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
Using the Interface
Programming Guidance
Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens. The Programming Menu
Structure Diagram provided below depicts this menu flow. A menu flow that corresponds to the
Programming Menu Structure Diagram is given at the beginning of each section. This flow is
designed to guide the user through the appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or
changed. The following example illustrates how the menu flow is used.
Example:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 1
1. Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu. Press RETURN.
2. Press 4 at the Program Menu. Press RETURN.
3. Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu. Press RETURN.
4. Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select "1. Department Dialing," when selected.
5. Press RETURN. Auto. Attn-Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal.
1. Mallbox
1. Program
Setting
2. Class of
Service
3. Port/Trunk
Service
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
2. Operator's
Parameter
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Custom
Service
Installation Manual
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
Programming Menu Structure Diagram
Mailbox No
Entry
1. Mailbox
Setting
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
1. Mailbox
Setting
2. Notification
Setting
1. Program
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
3. 3rd Device
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
3. Remote Call
FWD to CO
2. Class of
Service
COS No. (1-64)
Entry
1. Telephone No.1
2. Telephone No.2
1. Day Mode for each port
2. Night Mode for each port
3. Lunch Mode for each port
4. Break Mode for each port
1. Port Service
3. Port/Trunk
Service
1. Day Mode for each trunk group
2. Night Mode for each trunk group
2. Trunk Service
3. Lunch Mode for each trunk group
4. Break Mode for each trunk group
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
2. Operator's
Parameter
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
3. Lunch Mode
4. Break Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Enter Extension
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Delete Extension
3. Extension Listing
2. Custom
Service
Custom Service No. (1-100) Entry
1. Enter
3. Caller ID
Call Routing
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
Continued Next Page
208
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
1. Enter
5. System
1. System Group
Assignment
1. Mailbox
Group
Parameter
2. Delete
3. Listing
Setting
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Listing
2. Extension
Group
2. Time Group
Service
1. Service Mode
2. Time Service
1. Day Service
2. Lunch Service
3. Break Service
Time Group
No. Entry
3. Holiday Setting
1. Holiday Setting Enter
2. Holiday Setting Delete
3. Holilay Listing
4. Daylight Saving
Time
5. Prompt Setting
1. Enter
6. System Caller Name
Announcement
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
1. Extension Numbering Plan 1-16
2. Dialing Parameter
7. Others
3. Message Waiting Notification
4. External Message Delivery
5. Call Hold
6. Rotary Telephone Service
7. Intercom Paging Parameters
8. Fax Management
9. Disconnect Parameter
6. Hardware
Setting
1. RS-232C
2. Port Setting
for each port
3. PBX Interface
Parameter
1. Dialing
Parameter
2. Inband
Signaling
3. Digit Translation
Table
1. Inter-digit
Timeout
4. VPS Port
2. Input/Output
Installation Manual
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Up to 1022 Subscriber Mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence
of steps.
To access the proper menu for mailbox setup, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.
Table B-3
Parameter
Mailbox
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. Mailbox
number length is determined during setup or when
initialising the system. Mailbox numbers cannot begin with
"0". If the length of the mailbox number has been defined
as 3 digits, for example, the valid range for all mailbox
numbers would be 100 through 997 (998 and 999 would be
reserved for the Message Manager and the System
Manager). The length of the mailbox number cannot be
changed through the Mailbox Setting screen once it has
been specified.
Number
Editing Mailboxes
The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
To access the proper menu for mailbox editing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-1
Table B-4
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
The Extension
of the Owner
2-5 digits
(None)
Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a subscriber’s
mailbox.
Any valid extension number including an Extension Group
List number can be assigned.
Note: If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a
mailbox, all group members are able to share the
information stored there.
210
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Description/Function
Table B-4
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Owner's First
Name
Up to 16
alphabet
characters
(None)
The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed
on the Mailbox Assignments report.
Owner's Last
Name
The Dialling by Name feature uses the last name.
ClassofService COS No.1-62 Used to define the set of services available to the
No.
(1)
subscriber.
Note 1: We recommend that parameters for each COS
number be defined before assigning a Class of Service
(COS) number.
Note 2: COS No.63 pertains to the Message Manager
while COS No.64 pertains to the System Manager. These
numbers cannot be entered in the COS No. data field.
Covering
Extension
2-5 digits
(None)
Identifies the extension number that will receive
unanswered subscriber calls. The Automated Attendant
Service accomplishes this call transfer. The caller is given
the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in
the subscriber’s mailbox.
The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call
Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled
by the subscriber using the telephone keypad.
Note: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned as covering extensions.
Interview
Mailbox
Number
2-5 digits
(None)
Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox. The
interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox
number.
Note: The replies to an interview session constitute one
message. If the subscriber expects many interview
messages, "Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages " (see
COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS) should be
raised to a higher value. Possibly, the subscriber should be
assigned to a different COS.
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If this parameter is set to "Yes", all calls routed to the
extension are automatically forwarded to the extension’s
mailbox without ringing the telephone. Forwarding is
accomplished through the Automated Attendant service.
Callers are permitted to leave a message.
Note: When this feature has been set to "Yes", the mailbox
owner’s extension does not necessarily need to exist as a
phone extension of the PBX.
Installation Manual
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Notification Setting
Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device
feature. A maximum of 3 destinations (Device 1, 2, 3) can be specified per mailbox.
•
•
Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature.
If the destination device is a telephone, the subscriber will be called when he has
message(s), and will have a chance to listen to the message(s).
•
If the destination device is a beeper (pager), the subscriber will be notified when he has
message(s). If the beeper (pager) has a display, it is possible to send to it a callback
number. The caller can enter the callback number when he leaves a message. If he
does not enter a callback number, either the System Callback No., or the caller’s number
if it is received through a telephone company’s Caller ID service, will be sent instead.
To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-2-Device No. 1, 2, or 3.
Notification Setting-Device 1, 2, or 3
Table B-5
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Dial Number
Up to 32 digits Assigns a telephone or beeper (pager) number to
consisting of 1-9, Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the
dial number from his telephone.
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note: The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS and
"Type of Device" is set to "Beeper". The proper number
of "Pauses" must be inserted before the callback entry
code.
Type of Device 1. Telephone
Specifies the device to receive notification. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the
Dial Number (above). The subscriber can also specify
the type of device from his telephone.
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
212
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Description/Function
Table B-5
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Use Mode
1. Not Use
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
telephone.
2. Continuously
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
No. of Retries
0-4 times
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received.
(0)
Busy Delay
Time
2-120 min
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a busy condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
(3)
No Answer
Delay Time
2-120 min
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a no-answer condition is received before making
another notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
(30)
Time Frame 1,
2
MON:
TUE:
WED:
THU:
FRI:
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
Specifies the daily schedule for Message Waiting
Notification service for all days of the week.
Note: These parameters are active only when "Use
Mode" is set to "Scheduled".
a.m./p.m.
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
SAT:
SUN:
Remote Call Forward to CO
Follow the procedure below to specify the destination outside telephone number(s) to which
the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding feature is set to an outside (CO)
line.
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 can be specified per mailbox.
•
•
Class of Service programming determines if the mailbox owner is able to use this
feature.
This feature is only available with DPT Integration.
Installation Manual
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
To access the proper menu for Remote Forward to CO, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-3-Telephone Number 1 or
2.
Table B-6
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Telephone
Up to 24 digits Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
Number 1, 2
(With the KX-
TD500)
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an
outside (CO) line.
or
Up to 16 digits
(With other KX-TD
series PBXs)
(None)
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
" ".
The telephone number should begin with a Line Access
Code (to seize an outside [CO] line).
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Note
The KX-TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom. It is only available in some
countries.
Deleting a Mailbox
When a mailbox is deleted, the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox,
removes the mailbox from all group distribution lists, deletes the personal group distribution
lists assigned to the mailbox, erases the subscriber’s name, and cancels all external delivery
messages.
To access the proper menu for Deleting a Mailbox, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-2-Mailbox No.
214
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Resetting a Mailbox Password
Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for clearing a mailbox password.
To access the proper menu for clearing a mailbox password, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-3-Mailbox No.
Listing Mailboxes
Follow the procedure below to display the mailbox number list.
To display the list of all mailbox numbers, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-4
Installation Manual
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
The COS-Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to mailbox
owners. A maximum of 64 (1-64) classes can be specified. A class of service number can be
assigned for each mailbox. More than 1 subscriber can share the same class of service.
•
•
COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is only
available to the System Manager.
The procedure below determines the utilisation of the following special features on a
COS basis:
• Remote Call Forward to CO (available for COS numbers 1-63)
• Delete Message Confirmation (available for COS numbers 1-64)
• Message Waiting Notification (available for COS numbers 1-63)
• External Message Delivery (available for COS numbers 1-62)
• Auto Forwarding (available for COS numbers 1-62)
To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1-64, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(1-64)
Note
can be assigned only when the corresponding authorisation parameter is set to
"Yes".
Class of Service Setting
COS Nos. 1-62 (for subscribers)
To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1-62 for subscribers,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(1-62)
216
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Personal
Greeting
Length
8-60 s in 4 s
increments
(16)
Defines the maximum length of the personal greeting
message that can be recorded by the subscriber.
This parameter applies to:
•
•
•
•
Personal greeting on No Answer
Personal greeting on Busy
Personal greeting for After Hours
Personal greeting for Caller ID
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message
will remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the
day after the message reception.
(14)
Saved
Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(5)
Defines the number of days that a played message will
remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed"
whenever the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited"
is selected, the saved message will remain in the
mailbox until erased by the subscriber.
Message
Length
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(3)
Defines the maximum message length.
If set to "0: Unlimited", a subscriber can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person’s mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other
messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Mailbox
5-100 msgs
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Capacity
Maximum
Messages
(10)
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Message
Time
5-100 min
0: Unlimited
(10)
Specifies the total number of available minutes for
storing (both new and saved) messages in each
mailbox.
Message
Retrieval
Order
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved
(played back for listening).
1. LIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
2. FIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the
oldest.
Message
Scanning with 2. No
Information (No)
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender’s
name and the recording date and time to the message
during the message scan.
Installation Manual
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Play System
Prompt after
Personal
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", directions for recording a message are
given to the caller immediately after the personal
greeting has been played.
Greeting
The following guidance messages are played:
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more
features".
"To pause and restart recording, press 2".
Use Call
Waiting
on Busy
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS signals the busy extension that
another call is waiting.
Note: To use Call Waiting on Busy, you must also
enable the use of the Call Waiting feature at your PBX.
Message
Cancel for Live 2. No
Call Screening
1. Yes
The Live Call Screening feature permits the subscriber
to monitor incoming messages as they are being
recorded, or intercept them if desired. If the subscriber
chooses to speak to the caller, if not disabled by the PBX
beforehand, the VPS will record the two-way
conversation. If set to "Yes", the VPS will automatically
delete this recording.
(Yes)
The two-way conversation may be saved in the mailbox
if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded. If set
to "No", the recording will be automatically saved.
Note: The Live Call Screening feature is available if DPT
Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX-
TD series telephone system.
Direct Mailbox 1. Yes
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is able to directly enter
Subscriber Service. This is accomplished by calling a
VPS extension directly from the subscriber’s extension.
Access
2. No
(Yes)
The Subscriber Service Access Code (" " and mailbox
number) need not be dialled. Password entry may be
required if specified beforehand.
Note: The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic
KX-TD series telephone system.
Intercom
Paging Group
1-17
(Group 1)
Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to
the subscriber.
If set to "17", the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups.
Note: The Intercom Paging feature is available if DPT
Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX-
TD series telephone system.
218
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for
the subscriber during a Message Waiting Notification
Call and Subscriber Service.
3. User 2
(User 1)
Note: If User 1 is specified as Prompt Mode but not
recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory-recorded System prompts
in English. By default, User 1 prompts are not recorded.
Remote Call
Forward to CO 2. No
(No)
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; a subscriber can program his
extension from a remote location to forward various
types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or "Telephone
No.2" (preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any
other telephone number.
Note: The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available
if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system.
Important Note: With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is disabled. To enable
VPS Remote Call Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for
example, must be programmed properly. For the COS of
the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to an
outside (CO) line, enable the following: [504] Call
Forward to Outside Line.
Delete
Message
Confirmation
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the
mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased
immediately.
Number of
CIDs for Caller
Name
0-30
(30)
Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which
subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name
Announcement.
Announcement
Personal
Greeting for
CID
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", subscribers can utilise the personal
greeting feature for Caller ID.
Caller ID
Screening
1. Yes
2. No
If set to "Yes", subscribers can utilise the Caller ID
Screening feature.
(Yes)
Installation Manual
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Authorization
for Message
Notification
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the
Message Waiting Notification feature. The sub-
parameters to be set include Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode, MWL Notification for Unreceived Message, and
Device Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to
"No", sub-parameters cannot be assigned.
Note: This parameter in COS No.1 is set to "Yes" when
the Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber
Mailboxes.
Beeper
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Caller
After recording a message, the caller is
asked if the message is urgent. If urgent,
the caller is asked to enter the callback
number.
Select:
Without:
Before:
After:
Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before recording a message, the VPS asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
After recording a message, the VPS asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
Disable:
Disables the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Note: To utilise this feature, the callback number entry
code must be included in the subscriber’s beeper
(pager) number. When "Disable" is selected or if the
caller does not enter a callback number, "System
beeper’s (pager’s) display. If a caller’s number is
received through a telephone company’s Caller ID
service, the caller’s number will be displayed instead of
"System Callback No.".
MWL
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp will illuminate
when unplayed messages remain after the subscriber
has accessed the mailbox for Subscriber Service.
Notification for 2. No
Unreceived
Message
(Yes)
Device
Notification for 2. No
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are
received.
(No)
220
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Authorization
for External
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the External
Message Delivery feature. The sub-parameter to be set
is Prompt Mode. If set to "No", sub-parameter cannot be
assigned.
Delivery
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will
be greeted by the VPS in the specified language
(prompt). However, if "Selective" is enabled, then the
receiver has a choice of prompts. See related
explanation in "Incoming Call Service Prompt" in Table
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Note: When "Selective" is enabled and the receiver uses
a rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified by
Authorization
for Auto
Forwarding
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS automatically forwards
messages that have not been accessed for a specific
length of time to another mailbox. The sub-parameters to
be set for this feature include Mailbox Number, Delay
Time, and Forwarding Mode. If set to "No", sub-
parameters cannot be assigned.
Mailbox
Number
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be
forwarded.
Note: The numbers of the System Group Distribution
List cannot be specified as the destination.
Delay Time
(h) (min)
00:05 to 99:59
(00:30)
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the
VPS must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note: The delay time must be less than the New
Message Retention Time, or else messages will be
deleted before being forwarded.
Forwarding
Mode
1. Copy
2. Move
(Move)
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the
original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the
messages are retained in the original mailbox after
forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are
forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained
at the original location.
Installation Manual
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
COS Nos. 63 & 64 (for Managers)
To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 63 & 64 for Managers,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(63-64)
Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64. COS number
64 cannot assign the parameters relating to the Message Waiting Notification and the Remote
Call Forward to CO features.
Table B-8
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can
remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the day
after massage reception.
(30)
Saved
1-30 days
Defines the number of days a played saved message will
Message
0: Unlimited remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed" whenever
Retention Time
(30)
the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited" is selected,
saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by
the mailbox owner.
Message
Length
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(6)
Defines the maximum message length.
If set to "0: Unlimited", a manager can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person’s mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other messages
will automatically be set to 6 min.
Mailbox
5-100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
Capacity
Maximum
Messages
(100)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Mailbox
5-100 min
Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing
Capacity
0: Unlimited (both new and saved) messages in each mailbox.
Maximum
Message Time
(100)
Message
Retrieval Order 2. FIFO
1. LIFO
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved
(played back for listening).
(LIFO)
1. LIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
2. FIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest.
222
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-8
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Message
Scanning with 2. No
Information
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender’s name
and the recording date and time to the message during the
message scan.
(No)
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
Specifies the language used for voice prompts.
3. User 2
(User 1)
Note: If User 1 is specified as Prompt Mode but not
recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory-recorded System prompts in
English. By default, User 1 prompts are not recorded.
Remote Call
Forward to CO 2. No
(No)
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; the Message Manager can program his
extension from a remote location to forward various types of
calls to either "Telephone No.1" or "Telephone No.2"
(preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any other
telephone number.
Note: The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic
KX-TD series telephone system.
Important Note: With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is disabled. To enable
VPS Remote Call Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for example,
must be programmed properly. For the COS of the
extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to an outside
(CO) line, enable the following: [504] Call Forward to
Outside Line.
Delete
Message
Confirmation
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
If set to "No", the message is erased immediately.
Authorization
for Message
Notification
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", the Message Manager is able to utilise the
Message Waiting Notification feature. The sub-parameters
to be set include Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode, MWL
Notification for Unreceived Message, and Device
Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to "No", sub-
parameters cannot be assigned.
Installation Manual
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-8
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Beeper
1. Caller
Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits the Message Manager to use the Callback Number
Entry feature.
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
Caller
After recording a message, the caller is asked
if the message is urgent. If urgent, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Select:
Without:
Before:
After:
Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before recording a message, the VPS asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
After recording a message, the VPS asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
Disable:
Disables the Callback Number Entry feature.
Note: To utilise this feature, the callback number entry code
must be included in the subscriber’s beeper (pager)
number. When "Disable" is selected or if the caller does not
enter a callback number, "System Callback No." (see Table
a caller’s number is received through a telephone
company’s Caller ID service, the caller’s number will be
displayed instead of "System Callback No.".
MWL
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp illuminates when
unplayed messages remain after the Message Manager
has accessed the mailbox.
Notification for 2. No
Unreceived
Message
(Yes)
Device
Notification for 2. No
1. Yes
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are received.
Unreceived
Message
(No)
224
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK
SERVICE
One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX trunk (outside
line) group: Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service.
The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the prompt mode and
delayed answer time to be programmed.
Services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service has the highest priority.)
To access the proper menu for Port/Trunk Service Menu, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3
B4.1 Port Assignment
To access the proper menu for Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected
port, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-12)
Port (1-12)-Day Mode
To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-12)-1
Note
underlined. This sub-parameter can be assigned only when "Incoming Call Service
Prompt" is set to "Selective".
Installation Manual
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Table B-9
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Company
1-32
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
Greeting No.
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Incoming Call 1. Voice Mail
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Service
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
Note 1: When you specify the Interview Service, one of
subscriber’s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be
specified.
(Auto. Attn.)
Note 2: When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be
specified.
Incoming Call 1. System
Service Prompt 2. User 1
3. User 2
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his choice, provided the Message Manager
has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the
System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection
Number in "System/User 1/User 2 Prompt Selection
4. Selective
(User 1)
Note: If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for Rotary
Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary Callers 2. User 1
3. User 2
1. System
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a rotary
caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears
when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
(System)
Delayed
Answer
Time
0-15 s
(0)
Specifies the delayed answer time.
Time Group
No.
1-8
(1)
Assigns a time group number to the port.
Port (1-12)-Night Mode
To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-12)-2
226
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Port (1-12)-Lunch Mode
To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-12)-3
Port (1-12)-Break Mode
To access the proper menu for Break Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-12)-4
B4.2 Trunk Group Assignment
This assignment is effective only with DPT Integration.
To access the proper menu for Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected
PBX trunk (outside line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)
Note
For KX-TD series (except for KX-TD500), "trunk (outside line) group number" in this
section (assignment) means "CO line number".
Trunk (1-48)-Day Mode
To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected PBX trunk
(outside line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-1
Installation Manual
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Table B-10
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Company
Greeting No.
1-32
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the trunk
(outside line) group.
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Incoming Call 1. Voice Mail
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Service
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
5. None
Note 1: When you specify the Interview Service, one of
subscriber’s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be
specified.
(None)
Note 2: When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be
specified.
Incoming Call 1. System
Service Prompt 2. User 1
3. User 2
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this trunk (outside line) group. When set to "Selective", the
caller can select the language of his choice, provided the
Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual
Selection Menu and the System Administrator has
specified Prompt Selection Number in "System/User 1/
4. Selective
(User 1)
Note: If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for Rotary
Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary Callers 2. User 1
3. User 2
1. System
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a rotary
caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears
when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
(System)
Delayed
Answer
Time
0-15 s
(0)
Specifies the delayed answer time.
Time Group
No.
1-8
(1)
Assigns a time group number to the trunk (outside line)
group.
Trunk (1-48)-Night Mode
To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected PBX trunk
(outside line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-2
228
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Trunk (1-48)-Lunch Mode
To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode Features for PBX trunk (outside line)
group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-3
Trunk (1-48)-Break Mode
To access the proper menu for Break Mode Features for the selected PBX trunk (CO
line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-4
Installation Manual
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE
SETTINGS
B5.1 Automated Attendant Parameters
The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions: Department or Speed Dialing,
Operator’s Parameters, and Alternate Extension.
To access the proper menu for Automated Attendant Parameters, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1
Department Dialing
Department Dialing is a speed-dialling feature that permits a caller to reach the intended
extension by dialling a single digit (1-9).
To access the proper menu for Department Dialling, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-1
Table B-11
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Department
2-5 digits
Specifies the department extension number.
Dialing No.1-9
(None)
Note 1: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
Note 2: The Message Manager must record the
Department Dialing menu.
Operator’s Parameters
Use these parameters to specify the operator’s (operator 1, 2, 3) extensions and mailboxes,
as well as how to treat operator-seeking calls.
Operator’s parameters can be individually set for Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
To access the proper menu for Operator’s Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2
230
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Operator’s Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 1
Use this parameter to enable or disable the Operator Service. It specifies Operator 1’s
extension and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension. The extension number
assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager. When Operator
service is enabled, operator-seeking calls first reach Operator 1’s extension.
Notes
•
Because the extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is for the
Message Manager, you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox.
•
By default, the extension number for the Message Manager’s extension (assigned
for Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be
used with the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature and the Remote Call
Forwarding Set feature. When using these features, You must assign the
extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 1, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-1
Table B-12
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator
Service
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
Note: All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the General
Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled.
Operator’s
1-5 digits
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
Extension
(0)
Note 1: The default setting (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature. An
extension number must be assigned that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
Note 2: The extension number must not be assigned
anywhere else (in particular, the extension must not have
a mailbox). Otherwise, you will get an error message.
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(998)
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in
this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or
No Answer Coverage modes are set.
Installation Manual
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-12
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator No
Answer Time
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered within
the time set, the VPS will offer other options as defined by
the "No Answer Coverage Mode".
Note 1: This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
Note 2: If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator No
Answer Time" to 15 s.
Busy Coverage 1. Hold
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
Mode
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 1 extension is called again.
(Hold)
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals Operator 1 when another call is
waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave
Message
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
1. Caller Select—Allows the caller to leave a message or
call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available. For more
information, see the "Note" on "Caller Select" in Table
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to Operator 2.
Message
Repeat Cycle
1-3 times
Specifies the number of times the VPS will play the
Automated Attendant top menu.
(3)
Note
Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator call coverage
settings depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS. Even if the
operator call coverage parameters are set to "Next Operator" on Busy/No Answer,
the call may go to the VPS (if the Operator has set the call forwarding to the VPS).
232
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Operator’s Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 2
Operator 2 receives operator-seeking calls when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer and
Operator 1’s parameters are set as follows:
•
•
Busy Coverage Mode—No Answer Coverage
No Answer Coverage Mode—Next Operator
To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 2, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-2
Table B-13
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator’s
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 2. Any valid
extension number can be assigned.
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 2. Callers to
Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in this
mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
Answer Coverage modes are set.
BusyCoverage 1. Hold
Mode 2. No Answer
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 2
extension is busy.
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 2 extension is called again.
(Hold)
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals Operator 2 when another call
is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the call after
playing "Thank you for calling".
Installation Manual
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-13
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave
Message
Specifies how to handle Operator 2 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
1. Caller Select—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available. For more
information, see the "Note" on "Caller Select" in Table
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 2’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to Operator 3.
Operator’s Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 3
Operator 3 receives operator-seeking calls when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and
Operator 2’s parameters are set as follows:
•
•
Busy Coverage Mode—No Answer Coverage
No Answer Coverage Mode—next Operator
To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 3, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-3
Table B-14
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator’s
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 3. Any valid
extension number can be assigned.
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 3. Callers to
Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in this
mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
Answer Coverage modes are set.
234
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Description/Function
Table B-14
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
BusyCoverage 1. Hold
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 3
extension is busy.
Mode
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 3 extension is called again.
(Hold)
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals Operator 3 when another call
is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the call after
playing "Thank you for calling".
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave
Message
Specifies how to handle Operator 3 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
3. Disconnect
Message
(Caller Select)
1. Caller Select—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available. For more
information, see the "Note" on "Caller Select" in Table
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 3’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
Notes
•
An operator-seeking call will always reach Operator 1 first. The call will then be
transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 sequentially, depending on system
programming.
•
"Next Operator" is not applicable for "No Answer Coverage Mode" of Operator 3.
Operator’s Parameters-Night Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator’s Parameters-Lunch Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator’s Parameters-Break Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Installation Manual
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Alternate Extension Assignment
Assigns extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension transfer
sequence. Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the sequence
defined by "Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence" (see "Alternate Extension Transfer
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3
Alternate Extension Group-Enter
The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence.
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension-Enter Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-1
Table B-15
Parameter
Alternate
Extension
(1-32)
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies an extension, which requires a different
transfer sequence than normal.
Note: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
Alternate Extension-Delete
The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group.
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension-Delete Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-2
236
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Alternate Extension-Listing
Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group.
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension-Listing Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-3
B5.2 Custom Service
Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services. By assigning a function to each key, you
can provide callers with a customised key operation service. You can establish a maximum of
100 Custom Services with the possible depth of 8 layers. The Message Manager should record
Custom Service Menus so that callers will know which key to press.
Note
Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times.
To access the proper menu for Custom Service Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-2-Custom Service No.(1-100)
Table B-16
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description
Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
Specifies the language of services within Custom
Service.
3. User 2
(System)
Note: This parameter overrides "Incoming Call Service
Prompt".
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu
messages will be repeated to the caller.
Installation Manual
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-16
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Call Transfer
Anytime
Extn./Mbx/No
Specifies the destination to which the call will be
transferred. The "Extn." setting (enter "E") enables
callers to be transferred directly to their intended party
by dialling the extension number. The "Mbx" setting
(enter "M") enables callers to leave messages in a
mailbox by entering the mailbox number. The "No"
setting (enter "N") disables extension transfer and
mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries work (following the
Custom Service menu).
(Extn.)
Note: This parameter should be set to "No" when
Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service
option and it is desired that digits can be entered very
quickly to specify a mailbox. Therefore, in most cases,
"No" is the best setting for this parameter. This is
especially true if you do not want to explain "Call
Transfer Any Time" in your Custom Service menu
recording.
Wait for
Second Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Resolves the problem when the first digit of the
extension or mailbox number is the same as one of the
Custom Service menu choices. The VPS waits the
specified period of time for a second digit to be dialled.
If the time period expires without a second digit being
entered, the system assumes the caller has selected a
menu choice. Use this parameter only if "Call Transfer
Anytime" is set to "Extn." or "Mbx".
No DTMF Input
Operation
a-f
(c)
Specifies how to handle a call when there is no
response to the menu message. No response usually
*
See the following indicates that the caller is using a rotary phone. The
"Keypad
Assignment".
factory setting is "C. Operator", which allows the caller
to be automatically connected to an operator after
message playback.
238
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-16
Parameter
Keypad
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
a-n
Any of the 14 services listed below (a-n) can be
Assignment
0-9, , #
( : d, 0: c
Others: None)
assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the
telephone keypad. Callers are able to access these
services by pressing the corresponding keys on their
telephones.
(a) Transfer to Mailbox—Allows the caller to leave
messages in a specific mailbox. Enter "a" followed
by a mailbox number.
(b) Transfer to Extension—Transfers the caller to a
specific extension. Enter "b" followed by an
extension number.
(c) Operator—Connects the caller to the operator.
(d) Exit—Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller. The Message Manager is
responsible for recording this prompt.
(e) Previous Menu—If programmed, returns the caller
to the previous menu.
(f) Custom Service—If programmed, transfers the
caller to another Custom Service.
(g) Voice Mail Service—Allows the caller to access
Voice Mail Service.
(h) Call Transfer Service—Allows the caller to access
Automated Attendant Service.
(i) Subscriber Service—Allows the caller to access
Subscriber Service. If this option is enabled, it is
strongly recommended that each subscriber
establish a password; this will prevent
unauthorised callers from accidentally or
intentionally accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
(j) Department Dialling—Transfers the caller to the
Department Dialling menu.
(k) Dial by Name—Requests the caller to enter the
first 3 or 4 letters of a last name of the person they
wish to reach, then transfers him to the
corresponding extension.
(l) Repeat Menu—Repeats the Custom Service
menu prompts.
(m) Main Menu—Returns the caller to the Custom
Service top menu.
(n) FAX Transfer—Allows the caller to send fax
messages to an extension specified as the fax
extension.
Installation Manual
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
B5.3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired
destination. The VPS automatically forwards the calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers to
a programmed extension, mailbox (System Group Distribution List included) or Custom
Service. It also forwards "Private" (caller’s number is not received) and "Out of Area" calls to a
desired extension, mailbox or Custom Service.
The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature.
Services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service has the highest priority.)
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3
Caller ID Call Routing-Enter
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Enter, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-1-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
Table B-17
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Caller ID No.
P, O or
Assigns the telephone number to which the VPS applies
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9,
automatic forwarding to a desired destination. " "
substitutes any number (=wild card). For example, to
0,
(None)
route all calls from Area Code 201, enter "201
".
To have a "Private" call automatically forwarded to a
desired destination, enter "P".
For an "Out of Area" call, enter "O".
240
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Description/Function
Table B-17
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description
Up to 20
characters
(None)
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
number. Any ASCII character (except "\") can be used.
Note: When nothing is registered in this parameter but
the caller’s name is transmitted from the Telephone
Company, the name will be automatically registered in
this parameter. When this is done, an asterisk " " will
appear with the Call Transfer parameter if "PUTD" is
enabled. See 7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display
(PUTD) for more information. For example, you might see
this: "Custom 3 ". This indicates the name was
automatically registered in the VPS.
Call Transfer
Custom/Extn./ Specifies the destination to which the call from an
Mbx
(None)
assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded.
The "Custom" setting (enter "C") forwards callers to the
specified Custom Service menu. The "Extn." setting
(enter "E") forwards callers to the specified extension.
The "Mbx" setting (enter "M") enables callers to leave
messages in the specified mailbox. A System Group
Distribution List number can be specified here instead of
a mailbox number.
Caller ID Call Routing-Delete
Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list.
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Delete, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-2-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
Caller ID Call Routing-Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Listing, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-3
Installation Manual
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM
PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.1 System Group Assignment
To access the proper menu for System Group Assignment, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1
System Group Assignment-Mailbox Group
This parameter allows a caller to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes. These
mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The VPS is
able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists. Each list can have up to 20
destination mailbox numbers. Mailboxes can be added to or deleted from these lists and
reviewed as needed.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1
Mailbox Group-Enter
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group-Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-1-Group List No.
Table B-18
Parameter
Group
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant mailbox number. The caller can
specify that the VPS transfers or delivers messages to all
members of a group by simply specifying the System
Group Distribution List No.
List No.
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
(None)
Specifies a group name. If a group name is not required,
press RETURN, and specify the mailbox numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [(space)] can be used.
242
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-18
Parameter
Value Range
Description/Function
(Default)
Member
1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group.
Mailbox Group-Delete
Deletes specified mailboxes from the list.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-2-Group List No.
Mailbox Group-Listing
Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group-Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-3
System Group Assignment-Extension Group
You can assemble several extensions into a single list. The VPS is able to maintain up to 20
Extension Group Lists. Each list can support up to 20 extensions. You can add, delete, and
review the extensions. Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox and be
notified by the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature (if authorised) when a message is
present.
Extension Group-Enter
To access the proper menu for Extension Group-Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-1-Group List No.
Installation Manual
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-19
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Group List
No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant extension number.
Note: The Extension Group List number can be assigned
as "The Extension of the Owner" of a mailbox. This
permits all group members to share the information in the
mailbox.
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
(None)
Specifies a group name. If a group name is not required,
press RETURN, and specify the mailbox numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [(space)] can be used.
Member
1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number belonging to the group.
Note: Members cannot have a personal mailbox.
Extension Group-Delete
Deletes specified extensions from the list.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-2-Group List No.
Extension Group-Listing
Displays all Extension Group List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group List Numbers, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-3
B6.2 Time Group Service
A Time Group is a time frame in which Day/Night, Lunch and Break time periods can be
programmed.
The VPS maintains 8 Time Groups, and each of which can be assigned a specific setting.
It is necessary to assign a specific Time Group for use in each Port and Trunk Service in its
244
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
To access the proper menu for Time Group Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2
Time Group Service-Service Mode
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day/Night, Lunch, and Break Services) for each Time Group 1-8; however, the
System Administrator or the System Manager can change the current call handling method by
assigning a specific Service Mode to the desired Time Group.
To access the proper menu for Time Group Service-Service Mode for the selected
time group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-1-Time Group No.(1-8)
Table B-20
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Time Group 1. Automatic
Assigns a specific Service Mode to the Time Group.
There are 6 options available:
1-8
Mode
2. Manual Day
Mode
1. Automatic Mode—Operates according to the setting in
the Time Service.
3. Manual
Night Mode
4. Manual
Lunch Mode
5. Manual
Break Mode
6. PBX Control
Mode
2. Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day Mode.
3. Manual Night Mode—Operates only in Night Mode.
4. Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in Lunch Mode.
5. Manual Break Mode—Operates only in Break Mode.
6. PBX Control Mode—Operation changes depending
on PBX time period.
(Automatic
Mode)
Note: Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is
retained unless the System Manager or System
Administrator changes it again, even after the power is
cut and restored.
PBX Control Mode is available only if DPT Integration is
activated with a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
system. If PBX Control Mode does not function after it
has been selected, the VPS will operate in Automatic
Mode.
In Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday service has the highest priority.)
Installation Manual
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
In Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), services have this order of priority:
Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service is disregarded.)
Time Group Service-Time Service
Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time
of day; Day, Night, Lunch and Break Services are available.
Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters; Night Service starts when Day
Service ends, and ends when Day Service starts. There are 3 periods for Break Service: Break
1 Service, Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service.
You can have different Time Service settings for each Time Group 1-8.
In each Time Service period, the parameters for Port Service, Trunk Group Service and
Operator’s Parameters can be specified differently.
Note
Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service
period. If Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period, for example, Break 3 Service
does not work.
To access the proper menu for Time Group Service-Time Service for the selected
time group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-Time Group No.(1-8)
Time Service-Time Group (1-8)-Day Service
To access the proper menu for Day Service for the selected time group, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-Time Group No.(1-8)-1
Table B-21
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Mon
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Day Service.
(Start/End)
00-59: min
Day Mode: Day Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
Night Mode: Night Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
|
Sun
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
D: Day Mode
(Start/End)
N: Night Mode
(9:00 AM-5:00 PM)
246
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Time Service-Time Group (1-8)-Lunch Service
To access the proper menu for Lunch Service for the selected time group, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-Time Group No.(1-8)-2
Table B-22
Parameter
Mon
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
00-59: min
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Lunch
Service.
(Start/End)
|
Sun
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
(None)
(Start/End)
Time Service-Time Group (1-8)-Break Service
To access the proper menu for Break Service for the selected time group, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-Time Group No.(1-8)-3
Table B-23
Parameter
Mon
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
00-59: min
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Break
Service.
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
(None)
Note: When Break Service periods overlap Lunch
Service period, Lunch Service has priority.
|
Sun
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
Installation Manual
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.3 Holiday Setting
You can program special settings for up to 20 Holiday Services. On the day(s) specified as
holiday(s), settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service, Port Service
and Caller ID Call Routing.
When setting specific day(s) as holiday(s), you have the following 2 options:
•
The first option is to specify a single day on which to enable the Holiday Service setting.
For example, you can specify New Year’s Day as a holiday.
•
The second option is to specify a range of days to enable the Holiday Service setting on
all days within the specified range. For example, you can specify the start and the end
dates of your Christmas holiday.
Note
Holidays cannot overlap. For example, if you have set Dec. 22nd to Jan. 6th as
holidays, you cannot set Jan. 1st as a holiday.
To provide a special message to callers on a holiday (for example, "Today is New Year’s Day
and our office is closed. If you wish to record a message, please press 1 now".), you can create
a Custom Service menu. Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan. 1st. Use
foreign languages where appropriate.
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3
Holiday Setting-Enter
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting-Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-1-Holiday No.(1-20)
Table B-24
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Name of
Holiday
Up to 16 characters For reference. Any alphanumeric character, and
(None) [(space)], [-], [.] and [’] can be used.
248
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-24
Parameter
Date
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
DD/MM-DD/MM Specifies the day or the range of days on which to
or
enable Holiday Service setting.
DD/MM
(DD: Day
MM: Month)
(None)
•
•
If you want to set a single day as a holiday, specify
only one date.
If you want to set a range of days as holidays,
specify both the start and the end dates of the
range.
Note: Holidays cannot overlap.
Retain Holiday 1. Yes
Stores the Holiday Service setting for future use. If set
to "Yes", the same setting will be activated
automatically on the same day every year. If set to
"No", the setting will be cancelled automatically after
the holiday is over.
2. No
(No)
Service
1. Voice Mail
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the
holiday.
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
Note: When Interview Service is specified, one of
Subscriber’s Interview Mailbox numbers should also
be specified. When the Custom Service is specified,
one of Custom Service numbers (1-100) should also
be specified.
(Auto. Attn.)
Company
1-32
Specifies the Company Greeting to be played on the
Greeting No.
S: System Greeting holiday.
N: None
(S: System
Greeting)
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
(However, the Message Manager can change this.)
Port Affected
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port number on which the Holiday
Service setting is activated. The unspecified ports
provide the usual incoming call service.
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
The maximum number of ports depends on the VPS
model.
Trunk Affected
Trunk No.
(1-48)
Specifies the trunk (outside line) number on which the
Holiday Service setting is activated. The unspecified
trunks (outside lines) provide the usual incoming call
service.
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Installation Manual
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Holiday Setting-Delete
Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number (1-20).
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-2
Holiday Setting-Listing
Displays all of the specified holiday names and dates.
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting-Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-3
B6.4 Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Adjusts the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving time.
To access the proper menu for Daylight Saving Time, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-4
Table B-25
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Start Date/End
Date
DD: Day
MM: Month
(None)
Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight
saving time. The VPS advances 1 h on the starting
date of daylight saving time, and restores the time on
the ending date. Both the starting date and the ending
date must be set. The same date cannot be used for
both settings.
Note: The VPS changes to and from DST at 2:00 AM.
(TIME)) overrides the DST setting of the VPS.
250
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.5 Prompt Setting
This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
To access the proper menu for Prompt Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-5
Table B-26
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
System Prompt
Selection
Number
1-9
(None)
Assigns a selection number (1-9) to each prompt. Callers
use the numbers to select the desired language for their
message prompts. This setting is required when either one
or both of the following parameters are set to "Selective".
User 1 Prompt
Selection
Number
Port Assignment—Incoming Call Service Prompt
Authorisation of External Message Delivery—Prompt
Mode
User 2 Prompt
Selection
Number
Example:
For service in English, press (7).
For service in Spanish, press (8).
For service in Chinese, press (9).
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this
Multilingual Selection Menu.
Note: The Prompt Selection Number should not match the
first digit of any mailbox number, because mailbox/
extension access is possible during and after the
Multilingual Selection Menu.
Installation Manual
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-26
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp for 3. 24-h
1. Before
2. After
This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or
User 2 Prompts are in use. This parameter specifies the
following:
User 1 Prompt
(After)
Position of
1. Before—the VPS announces "AM/PM" before the time
"AM/PM" in
(e.g., P.M. 3:42).
Time Stamp for
User 2 Prompt
2. After—The VPS announces "AM/PM" after the time
(e.g., 3:42 P.M.).
3. 24-h—the VPS announces the time in 24-h format
(e.g., 15:42).
Note: When System Prompts are in use, the parameter is
set to "After".
B6.6 System Caller Name Announcement
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce prerecorded Caller ID caller names
when extension users listen to messages from the assigned numbers left in their mailbox.
Extension users can also hear caller names when the VPS forwards calls from the assigned
numbers to them (Caller ID Screening). The recorded caller names will also play when the
callers use the Intercom Paging features; the recorded names will be added to the end of the
page.
The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS (Class of Service) settings.
This feature is also enabled by selecting "Call Screening" in 4.1 Call Transfer Status in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" in 4.1 Call Transfer
Status, and/or in 4.4 Message Reception Mode in the Subscriber’s Guide.
The Message Manager is responsible for recording System Caller Names.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6
System Caller Name Announcement-Enter
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Enter, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-1-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
252
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-27
Parameter
Value Range
Description/Function
(Default)
Caller ID No.
Up to 20 digits
Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS
consisting of 1-9, 0 announces prerecorded caller name to extension
users.
(None)
Description
Up to 20 characters Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
(None)
number. Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
System Caller Name Announcement-Delete
Deletes specified Caller ID List numbers from the list.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Delete, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-2-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
System Caller Name Announcement-Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Listing, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-3
B6.7 Other Parameters
To access the proper menu for Other Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7
Other Parameters-Extension Numbering Plan
Specifies the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognise the dialled
extension as valid. This setting promotes the call handling of the Automated Attendant Service.
We recommend that this parameter be set for better integration with the PBX.
Installation Manual
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
To access the proper menu for Extension Numbering Plan, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-1
254
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-28
Parameter
Value Range
Description/Function
(Default)
Numbering
Plan
1-16
2-5 digits
consisting
of 0-9, X
(Numbering
Plan 2:
Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension
numbers. You can add up to 16 entries to the list. Each
entry can contain 2-5 digits "0-9", and a letter "X" which
matches any digit. Extension numbers cannot begin with
"0".
2XX;
Numbering
Plan 3:
Examples:
a) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 201
through 264 and 301 through 364, specify the numbers
as follows:
3XX;
Numbering
Plan 1, 4-16:
None)
2XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "2".
3XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "3".
b) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400
through 450 and 3300 through 3399, specify the
numbers as follows:
4XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "4".
33XX: Indicates any 4-digit extension starting with
"33".
Note:
Auto Configuration will set this parameter automatically.
The Automated Attendant will dial any 2-5 digit PBX
extension number (except numbers beginning with "0")
whether valid or not. If the dialled number is included in the
numbering plan, the Automated Attendant will immediately
send it to the PBX without waiting for further input. If not, the
Automated Attendant will wait until the dialled number is
recognised as an extension number, the internal inter-digit
timer expires, or the caller dials 5 digits.
If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the
Numbering Plan, the VPS will consider it an outside
number. The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the
"Outgoing Call Setup Sequence".
Other Parameters-Dialing Parameter
To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-2
Installation Manual
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-29
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Number of
Digits
0-8 digits
Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an
outside (CO) line.
(1)
to Access
Outside Line
Example:
If the PBX requires callers to dial "9" to access an
outside (CO) line, this parameter should be set as "1".
This enables the system to recognise that an outgoing
call setup sequence is completed once the initial "9"
has been dialled (9-123-4567). The full sequence is
therefore: 9-(outgoing call setup sequence)-123-4567.
The VPS can discriminate between local and long
distance calls and can report outgoing calls and calling
times for billing purposes on periodic port usage
reports.
Call Transfer
No Answer
Time
10-60 s
(20)
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait
before retrieving the transferred call when there is no
answer at the destination extension.
Note: Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No
Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call
Forwarding No Answer Time at the PBX. Otherwise,
the PBX may forward the call (transferred by the VPS)
immediately to its destination without leaving enough
time to answer the call.
Outgoing Call
No Answer
Time
10-90 s
(30)
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait
before concluding that there is no answer at the
outside number called.
Pause Time
1-9 s
Specifies the pause time between dialled digits.
(2)
Outgoing Call
Setup
Sequence
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, , #, F, R, S, T,
Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS
when calling an outside (CO) line. You can set up to 12
digits. The default value is "T". "T" indicates that the
system will dial the telephone number only after
detecting a dial tone.
W
(T)
Example:
9W = (9) - 2-s wait - dial telephone number. "9" is the
outside (CO) line access number.
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
256
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Other Parameters-Message Waiting Notification
Controls the handling of message waiting notification calls.
To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-3
Table B-30
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Device feature. The VPS makes outgoing
calls using the port specified in this parameter. At least 1
port must be specified.
Message
Waiting Lamp
Ports
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Lamp feature.
The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the
extension using the port specified in this parameter. At
least 1 port must be specified.
Message
Waiting Lamp 2. Yes
for Every
Message
1. No
If set to "Yes", the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting
Lamp of the extension each time a new message is
recorded in the mailbox. This will occur even if the
Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a
previous message. This setting is useful when the first
attempt is unsuccessful.
(Yes)
If set to "No", the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting
Lamp for the first message only. The VPS will not turn on
the lamp for subsequent messages until the subscriber
has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages stored
there.
Max. Digits for
Callback No.
1-48 digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits the caller can
enter as a callback number. This number will display on
beepers (pagers) if the "Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode" is enabled.
(20)
Callback No.
Entry Interdigit
Time-Out
1-10 s
(5)
Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on
Beeper Callback No. Entry. If the caller does not enter
any digits within the specified time, the VPS will not
accept entry of any additional digits.
Installation Manual
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-30
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
System
Callback No.
Up to 32 digits Specifies a telephone number that will display on the
(None)
subscriber’s beeper (pager) as a callback number. The
callback number entry mode "X" must be included in the
telephone number.
Note: If "Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode" is enabled
through COS, the callback number entered by the caller
will display on the destination beeper (pager). However,
if the caller fails to enter a callback number, the System
Callback No. will display instead.
Other Parameters-External Message Delivery
Controls the handling of External Message Delivery calls.
To access the proper menu for External Message Delivery, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-4
Table B-31
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Retry Times
0-4 times
Specifies the number of times to attempt an external
message delivery call when the destination is busy or if
there is no answer.
(3)
Busy Delay
2-60 min
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait
after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver
the message again.
(3)
No Answer
Delay
2-120 min
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait
after a no answer condition is received before trying to
deliver the message again.
(60)
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message
Delivery feature.
Message
Length
1-6 min
Specifies the allowable message length of external
delivery messages that the subscriber can record.
(3)
Max.
Messages for
Mailboxes
1-100 msgs
Specifies the maximum number of external delivery
messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox.
(3)
258
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-31
Parameter
System
External
Message
Delivery
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-9 min
Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowed
for an external message delivery call to prevent excessive
telephone charges. Time begins counting when the
destination number answers the call. The VPS terminates
the call when it exceeds the specified length of time.
However, the VPS does not terminate a call until the
whole message is played even though the specified time
expires.
(3)
Duration Time
Company’s
Up to 32 digits Specifies the Company’s Telephone Number. When the
Telephone No.
(None)
recipient has failed to retrieve the sender’s message
because of incorrect password entries, the VPS
announces the Company’s Telephone Number for him to
call in order to retrieve it.
Other Parameters-Call Hold
To access the proper menu for Call Hold, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-5
Table B-32
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Call Hold Mode 1. Disable
2. Enable
If set to "Enable", the VPS gives callers the option of
either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of
several Incomplete Call Handling service options.
(Enable)
While on hold, the VPS periodically gives callers the
choice to either continue to hold or select one of the
Incomplete Call Handling service options.
If set to "Disable", the VPS immediately offers callers the
Incomplete Call Handling service.
Call Queuing
Announcement 2. Enable
1. Disable
If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their
current position in the call hold queue.
Mode
(Enable)
Example:
"One other person is queuing".
Call Retrieval
Announcement
Timing
1-30 s
(2)
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
message that asks whether or not calls are to be
retrieved during call holding.
Example:
"To cancel holding, press 2 now.
Otherwise, I’ll try your party again".
Installation Manual
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-32
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Redialing
Cancel Timing 2. 30 s
1. 15 s
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
messages that ask if continuous redials are to be
attempted during call holding.
3. 45 s
4. 60 s
(30)
Example:
"To continue holding, press 1.
Otherwise, press 2".
Other Parameters-Rotary Telephone Service
Specifies how to treat callers who are calling from rotary telephones (unable to input touchtone
signals) or who are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance.
To access the proper menu for Rotary Telephone Service, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-6
Table B-33
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Rotary
1. G. D. M.
Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary
telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with
the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service.
Telephone Call 2. Operator
Coverage
Extension
(Day), (Night)
(G. D. M.)
Note: G.D.M. = General Delivery Mailbox.
Other Parameters-Intercom Paging Parameter
Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller’s party through
telephone speakers. To utilise this feature, the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature
available and the VPS must be properly programmed. This feature is available for DPT
Integration mode only.
To access the proper menu for Intercom Paging Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-7
260
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-34
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Intercom
Paging
Sequence
Up to 12 digits con- Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by
the PBX. This can be programmed using up to 12 of
the following 8 letters and 12 dial codes.
sisting of 0-9, , #
and special codes
(FXW)
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Pager Dialling
A: Answer
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Digits
Release for
Intercom
Paging
Up to 12 digits con- Specifies the intercom paging release code required
by the PBX. This can be programmed using up to 12 of
the 8 letters and 12 dial digits as specified above.
sisting of 0-9, , #
and special codes
(FW)
No Answer
Time for
Intercom
Paging
1-30 s
(5)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must
wait before concluding Intercom Paging when there is
no answer.
The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party does
not respond before this timer expires.
Announcement
Repeat Cycle
1-3 times
Specifies the number of times to announce the
intercom page.
(1)
Example:
"I have a call for (mailbox owner’s name)".
Intercom
Paging Retry
1-10 times
Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the
paging destination is busy or if there is no answer.
(2)
Note: This setting applies only when the subscriber
has enabled "Intercom Paging" in Incomplete Call
Handling Status.
Paging Code
for Group 1-16
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
Specifies the intercom paging access code required by
the PBX.
0-9, ,# for each
group
Paging Code
for All Groups
Note: The Intercom Paging Group Number available
for each subscriber is determined on a COS-by-COS
basis.
(None)
Other Parameters-Fax Management
You can program the VPS to automatically forward incoming fax calls to a fax extension. You
can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for the Automatic Fax Transfer.
Installation Manual
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the VPS will forward the fax
transmission to the alternate fax extension.
To access the proper menu for Fax Management, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-8
Table B-35
Parameter
Automatic
Transfer of
Incoming Fax
Call
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1: Disable
2: Enable
(Disable)
Enables or disables the Automatic Transfer of Incoming
Fax Call Service.
Note: Automatic detection works for only the first 30s.
Main Fax
2-5 digits
Specifies the main fax extension number.
Extension No.
(None)
Alternate Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the alternate fax extension number. When the
main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the
specified "Fax No Answer Time", the VPS forwards the
fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Fax No Answer
Time
5-60 s
(10)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must
wait before taking other action when there is no answer
at either fax extension.
Note: This timer applies to the fax call that has been
transferred to the main or alternate fax extension.
Fax Manager
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number. The VPS
will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls
depending upon the settings of the "Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode" and "Fax Notification Mode "
parameters.
Fax No Answer 1. No
Coverage Mode 2. Mbx
3. Ext
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager’s mailbox.
(No)
Example: "The FAX transfer situation is as follows. One
attempt was no answer".
1. If set to "Ext", the VPS will call the Fax Manager’s
extension to specify the number of unanswered fax
calls received.
2. If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager’s mailbox.
3. If set to "No", the VPS will take no action concerning
unanswered fax calls.
262
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-35
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Fax Notification 1. No
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager’s
mailbox.
Mode
2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
Example: "You have 1 FAX message".
1. If set to "Ext", after a fax extension successfully
receives a fax call, the VPS will automatically call the
Fax Manager’s extension and play a voice prompt:
"You have 1 FAX message". The VPS will also leave
the total number of received fax calls in the Fax
Manager’s mailbox.
2. If set to "No", the VPS will not take any action
concerning successfully received fax calls.
Other Parameters-Disconnect Parameter
To access the proper menu for Disconnect Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-9
Table B-36
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Maximum
Silence Time
5-60 s
(10)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the VPS
must wait until it disconnects the call when silence is
detected.
Installation Manual
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE
SETTINGS
For System Administration (system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis), an RS-232C
terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS.
To access the proper menu for Hardware Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters
To access the proper menu for RS-232C Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-1
Table B-37
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Baud Rate
1. 300 bps
Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in
bits per second.
2. 600 bps
3. 1200 bps
4. 2400 bps
5. 4800 bps
6. 9600 bps
7. 19200 bps
8. 38400 bps
(9600)
Word Bit
Length
1. 7 bits
2. 8 bits
(8 bits)
Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
Specifies the parity to use for error detection.
Parity
1. None
2. Odd
3. Even
(None)
Stop Bit Length 1. 1 bit
2. 2 bits
Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of
the byte.
(1 bit)
264
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
B7.2 Port Setting
To access the proper menu for Port Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-2
Port Setting Menu
To access the proper menu Port Setting Menu for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-2-Port No.(1-12)
Table B-38
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Flash Time
1. 100 ms
Specifies the duration of the flash (recall) signal that the
VPS will send to the PBX. See the PBX manual to
determine the correct value.
2. 300 ms
3. 600 ms
4. 900 ms
(100)
CPC Signal
1. None
Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an
interruption in the CPC (Calling Party Control) signal
received from the PBX. The VPS is able to determine
that the line has been disconnected when it detects an
interruption of the CPC signal.
2. 6.5 ms
3. 150 ms
4. 300 ms
5. 450 ms
6. 600 ms
(6.5)
Disconnect
Time
1-8 s
(2)
Specifies the length of time the line will temporarily be
unavailable after a call has ended.
Dial Mode
1. DTMF
Specifies the dial mode for DTMF (touchtone) or Pulse.
If Pulse is specified, pulse speed (10/20 pps) must be
selected.
2. Pulse 10 pps
3. Pulse 20 pps
(DTMF)
Note: This setting only affects outward dialling from the
VPS. The VPS can only receive DTMF (touchtone)
signals.
B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters
Three separate parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signalling and
performance with the PBX.
Installation Manual
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
To access the proper menu for PBX Interface Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3
Dialing Parameters
These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing
calls, and control message waiting lamps on extensions. The procedure for verifying the
correct code sequences for non-Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems is to manually
execute the sequences from a single line telephone (SLT) with the PBX.
To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-1
Table B-39
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
PBX Type 1. Other Manufacturers Specifies the type of PBX connected to the VPS. In
the case of a Panasonic KX-T series telephone
system, the model number should also be specified.
1. T308
2. KX-T Series
2. T616
3. T1232/TA series
4. T96
5. T336
Note: The Dialing Parameters are set automatically
to each PBX default value after selecting the PBX
type except when setting "Other Manufacturers".
6. TD816
7. TD1232
8. TD500
9. Reserved
(Other Manufacturers)
Table B-40
PBX Type
KX-T series
Other
Manu-
facturers
T1232/
TA
series
TD816/1232
TD612
T308
T616
T96
T336
TD500
Integration
Mode
None
None
Inband Inband
Inband Inband Inband *DPT Inband *DPT
Inband
Inband
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
266
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-40
PBX Type
KX-T series
Other
Manu-
facturers
T1232/
TA
series
TD816/1232
TD612
T308
T616
T96
T336
TD500
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FX
FX
FTX
FX
FX
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
Sequence
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW FWW
FWW FWW
FWW FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW FWW FWW
FWW FWW FWW
FWW FWW FWW
F
F
F
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
F
F
Reconnect
Sequence on
No-Answer
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refused Call
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
T701X# T#91X
T701X
—
—
T701X
T700X
—
—
T 9X
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
T702X# T#90X T#9X T700X
Waiting Lamp
Call Waiting
Sequence
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
F
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
F
2
F
2
F
2
F
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
*
When your KX-TD series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode.
N/A Not available
Not needed
—
Note
The UK version KX-T1232 does not support Inband Integration.
Installation Manual
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-41
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Integration
Mode
1. None
2. Inband
3. DPT
Specifies the method of integrating the VPS with the
PBX.
1. None—Both PBX and VPS work independently,
without accessing information concerning the status
of the other.
(None)
2. Inband—The PBX sends touchtone codes to the
VPS to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,
disconnect, etc.). Inband Integration improves the
VPS performance because call state recognition is
faster than with standard call progress tone
detection. The PBX code for each call state must be
set in the Inband Signaling Parameters. If PBX type
is set to a KX-T series telephone system, the Inband
Signaling Parameters will automatically default to
the proper codes. This is available with any of the
following Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems:
TA series, T96, T336, TD816, TD1232, TD612 and
TD500.
3. DPT—The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
DPT interface. This is available with any of the
following Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
systems: TD816, TD1232, TD612 and TD500.
To program the following 10 Parameters in the next table, use the Special Commands and Dial
Codes listed below. You can set up to 12 digits for each parameter.
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Extension dialling
A: Answer
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Table B-42
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to the operator’s extension.
(FX)
(FX)
Extension
Transfer
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to any extension except the operator’s.
Sequence
268
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Description/Function
Table B-42
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
(FX)
Sequence
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
If an extension is busy, this sequence allows the VPS to
reconnect to the caller.
(FWW)
(FWW)
(FWW)
Reconnect
Sequence on
No Answer
If the extension does not answer, this sequence allows the
VPS to reconnect with the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
The VPS performs this sequence to retrieve a call placed
on hold after the extension (in the Call Screening mode)
has refused to accept it.
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to
enable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
(None)
(None)
Waiting Lamp
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to
disable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
Waiting Lamp
Call Waiting
Sequence
The VPS carries out this sequence when performing call
waiting if the extension being called is busy.
(None)
(None)
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
The VPS performs this sequence to release call waiting.
Inband Signaling Parameters
Use these parameters if the PBX sends touchtones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call
(busy, answered, disconnected, etc.). The integration mode must be set to "Inband". If PBX
type is set to a KX-T series telephone system, the Inband Signaling parameters will
automatically default to the proper codes.
To access the proper menu for Inband Signaling Parameters, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-2
The following parameters can be programmed using "0-9", " ", "#", and "A-D".
Installation Manual
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-43
Parameter
Ringback
Busy
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Indicates "Ringback Tone". Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialled is ringing.
(1)
(2)
Indicates "Busy Tone". Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialled is busy.
Reorder
Indicates "Reorder Tone". Sent to the VPS when an
invalid extension number is dialled or when inadvertently
connected to another VPS.
(3)
DND
Indicates "Do Not Disturb Tone". Sent to the VPS if the
dialled extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled.
(4)
(5)
Answer
Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the
call.
Forward to VM
Ringing
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to
accept the call.
(6)
(7)
(8)
Forward to VM
Busy
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to
accept the call.
Forward to
Other
Extension
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to
another, non-Voice Mail extension.
Confirmation
Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialled a Message
Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code.
(9)
Disconnect
(#9)
Sent to the VPS when the other party goes "on-hook".
Note
Default values in the above table vary depending on the settings of "PBX type" and
"Inband Integration" (PBX Interface Parameters).
Table B-44
KX-T series
Other
Manufacturers
TD816/
1232
TD612
Parameter
T1232/
TA series
T308 T616
T96
T336
TD500
Ringback
Busy
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
A1
B1
B2
B3
A2
C1
A1
B1
B2
B3
A2
C1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Reorder
DND
Answer
Forward to VM
Ringing
270
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-44
KX-T series
Other
Manufacturers
TD816/
T1232/
Parameter
T308 T616
T96
C2
T336
C2
1232
TD500
TA series
TD612
Forward to VM
Busy
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7
7
8
7
8
Forward to
8
C3
C3
Other Extension
Confirmation
Disconnect
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
9
D1
D1
9
9
#9
DD
DD
#9
#9
N/A: Not available
Note
The UK version KX-T1232 does not support Inband Integration.
Digit Translation Table Parameters
Use the Digit Translation Table to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the
proper codes for the VPS. This translation table is only effective for the incoming signal.
To access the proper menu for Digit Translation Table Parameters, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Inter-Digit Timeout
To access the proper menu for Inter-Digit Timeout, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3-1
Table B-45
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Inter-Digit
Timeout
1-4 s
Defines the incoming signal interval (Follow on ID). The
Digit Translation Table will translate signals received
within the specified time period.
(1)
Installation Manual
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Input/Output
To access the proper menu for Input/Output, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3-2
Table B-46
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Table Input digit
1-8
Up to 8
digits
Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming
signal. If this occurs, the system will take the first
assignment.
consisting of
Output
digit
0-9, , #,
A-D
(None)
VPS Port Parameters
These parameters specify the extension numbers of VPS ports.
To access the proper menu for VPS Port Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-4
Table B-47
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Extension No.
of the VPS port
1-12
2-4 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number of each VPS port.
Note: Extension numbers of the VPS ports will
automatically be assigned when: (1) Auto Configuration is
executed, or (2) PBX type has been changed.
272
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX
C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
The System Manager’s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any System Manager
task. To access the System Manager’s Mailbox, three items of information must be known: the
telephone number answered by Voice Mail Service, the System Manager’s Mailbox Number
and the Password for that mailbox (if assigned). The System Manager’s Mailbox Number is 99,
999 (default), 9999, or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System
Programming. The System Manager’s password is assigned through the System Manager’s
Service.
To Access the System Manager’s Mailbox
1. Dial an Extension Number providing Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS Extension
Number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Please enter the person’s mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
2. Press [ ], then Type the System Manager’s Mailbox Number (99, 999, 9999 or 99999).
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3. Type the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of System Manager’s Service will be
played:
You have (number) new message(s).
To receive the message, press [1].
To deliver a message, press [2].
To customise your mailbox, press [3].
To check the mailbox distribution, press [4].
For a system report, press [5].
For other features, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
274
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The System Manager’s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to
maintain system organisation by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the System
Manager cannot set up mailboxes. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can both create and edit Subscriber Mailboxes by following the steps
below.
At any step, when editing an assigned mailbox’s parameters, change current settings by
Pressing [1]. To leave the current setting unchanged, Press [2].
When creating a new mailbox, the following parameters can be set:
•
•
•
•
Mailbox Number
Subscriber’s Name—recorded by the subscriber.
Extension Number
Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s Last Name—Enter only the first 3 or 4 letters of
the owner’s last name.
•
•
Class of Service Number—Enter any COS number (1-62).
Interview Mailbox Number—Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from
Subscriber Mailbox Numbers
•
All Calls Transfer Mailbox
Follow the steps listed below to create, edit or delete any mailbox parameter.
1. Log in to the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [1] to Assign or Edit.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [2] to accept the entry.
7. As each parameter plays:
Installation Manual
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
a) Press [1] to enter the new parameter or [2] to leave the parameter unchanged.
b) Enter the parameter.
c) Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
8. The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered. When this
entry is completed, the prompt at Step 4 will appear. Continue assigning or editing other
mailboxes by repeating Steps 5-7.
9. To return to the Main Menu, Press [ ] twice.
Deleting a Mailbox
The System Manager must delete the mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another
person accesses the VPS, the action is automatically cancelled.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [2] for Delete.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the mailbox.
Deleting a Mailbox Password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must delete the password before it can
be reassigned by the subscriber.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for the Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [3] for Password Reset.
5. Type the mailbox number.
276
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
6. Press [1] to delete the password.
Installation Manual
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS
Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to mailbox owners. A maximum of
64 Class of Services can be established. Each Class of Service can be set using the
telephone. COS No.63 and No.64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System
Manager respectively.
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
*1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Personal Greeting Length—Length ranges from 8-60 s in increments of 4 s.
New Message Retention Time—Maximum time is 30 days.
Saved Message Retention Time—Up to 30 days/0: Unlimited.
Message Length—Length ranges from 1-6 min/0: Unlimited.
Number of Messages—The number of messages range from 5-100.
Total Message Time—Total message time ranges from 5-100 min/0: Unlimited.
Message Retrieval Order—Settings are LIFO (Last In First Out) or FIFO (First In First
Out).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Message Scanning with Information—Settings are enable or disable.
*1
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting—Settings are enable or disable.
*1
Call Waiting on Busy—Settings are enable or disable.
*1
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening—Settings are enable or disable.
*1
Direct Mailbox Access—Settings are enable or disable.
*1
Intercom Paging Group Number—1-17
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
1. System Prompt
2. User 1 Prompt
3. User 2 Prompt
*2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote Call Forward to CO—Settings are enable or disable.
Delete Message Confirmation—Settings are enable or disable.
*1
Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement—0-30
*1
Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID—Settings are enable or disable
*1
Caller ID Screening—Settings are enable or disable
*2
Message Notification—Settings are enable or disable
*1
External Message Delivery—Settings are enable or disable
*1
Auto Forwarding—Settings are enable or disable
*1
*2
Not available for COS No.63 (Message Manager) and COS No.64 (System Manager)
Not available for COS No.64 (System Manager)
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the
System Manager cannot set COS parameters. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function
is not available".
278
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [2] to set Class of Service.
4. Type the Class of Service Number (1-64).
Personal Greeting Length
5.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Type the Personal Greeting length (8-60 s).
Note
The value goes up in increments of 4 s.
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
New Message Retention Time
6.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the retention time (up to 30 days).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Saved Message Retention Time
7.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the retention time (up to 30 days or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Length
8.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Type the message length (1-6 min or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Number of Messages
9.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the number of messages (5-100).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Total Message Time
10.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the total message time (5-100 min or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Retrieval Order
11.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current order (LIFO or FIFO).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Scanning with Information
12.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting
13.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Call Waiting on Busy
14.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
15.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
280
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Direct Mailbox Access
16.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Intercom Paging Group Number
17.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the group number (1-17).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Note
If set to "17 (Group 17)", the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all
groups (1-16).
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
18.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1], [2], or [3] to change the desired mode.
•
•
•
[1] System Prompt
[2] User 1 Prompt
[3] User 2 Prompt
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
Remote Call Forward to CO
19.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Delete Message Confirmation
20.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement
21.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the number of Caller IDs (0-30).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID
22.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Caller ID Screening
23.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Notification
24.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If the
Message Notification is enabled, go to Step 24b below.
b) Press [1], [2], [3], [4], or [5] to choose the desired Beeper Callback Number Entry
Mode.
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Caller Select Mode
[2] Without message mode
[3] Before message recording mode
[4] After message recording mode
[5] Disable All Entry Mode (Caller cannot access beeper [pager])
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [6] to accept it.
d) The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message plays. Press [1]
to change the setting (enable or disable).
e) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
f) The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message plays. Press [1]
to change the setting (enable or disable).
g) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Return to Step 24a above.
282
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
External Message Delivery
25.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If the
External Message Delivery is enabled, set the prompt mode for receiving External
Delivery Messages (go to Step 25b below).
b) The current prompt mode plays. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired
mode.
•
•
•
•
[1] System Prompt
[2] User 1 Prompt
[3] User 2 Prompt
[4] Selective Prompt
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [5] to accept it. Return to Step 25a above.
Auto Forwarding
26.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If
Auto Forwarding is enabled, go to Step 26b below.
b) The current forwarding destination mailbox number plays. Press [1] to change the
mailbox number.
c) Type the mailbox number.
d) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
e) The current delay time is played. Press [1] to change the setting. The delay time is
the period of time that the VPS must wait before forwarding messages. For
example, enter 115# to set the delay time to 1 h 15 min; 30# to set 30 min.
f) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
g) The current forwarding mode is played. Press [1] to change the setting (copy or
move).
h) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Return to Step 26a above.
Installation Manual
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The system clock can be set directly from the telephone. It is important to set the exact time
because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery, redialling and
rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion are all
scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able
to set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins
and ends.
Note
The System Manager cannot set the system clock while:
•
•
the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer,
the Message Manager sets the system clock, records the Voice Labels and
System Caller Names, and customises the Message Manager’s Mailbox.
"The VPS plays Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [3] to set the time and date.
4. Press [1] to change the current time.
5. Type the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o’clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15,
press 5, 1, 5, and #".
6. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of ’AM/PM’ in Time
7. Press [2] to accept the time.
8. Press [1] to change the current date.
9. Type the current month and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #".
284
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
10. Type the day and Press [#].
11. Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
12. Press [2] to accept the date.
Installation Manual
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Services) for each Time Group 1-8; however,
the System Manager or System Administrator can change the current call handling method by
assigning a specific Service Mode to the desired Time Group.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is retained unless the System Manager or
System Administrator changes it again, even after the power is cut and restored.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the System
Manager cannot change the Service Mode setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this
function is not available".
Assigning the Service Mode
There are 6 Service Modes available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in Lunch Mode
Manual Break Mode: Operates only in Break Mode
PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period (available only
with DPT Integration)
In the Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday service has the highest priority.)
In the Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), Holiday Service is disregarded:
Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service is disregarded.)
When a call is received through a PBX in the PBX Control Mode, the VPS obtains the Time
Service (Day, Night, Lunch or Break) setting from the PBX and operates accordingly.
When the Integration Mode is other than DPT Integration and the PBX Control Mode is
selected, the VPS will operate in the Automatic Mode.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, the PBX Control
Mode may not function properly. For more information, consult your dealer.
Follow the steps below to assign a Service Mode to each Time Group 1-8.
1. Log in the main menu.
2. Press [6] for other features.
286
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
3. Press [4] to change Service Mode setting.
4. Type the Time Group number (1-8).
5. The VPS plays the current setting. Press [1] to change the setting.
6. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to choose the desired Service Mode entry.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
[2] Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
[3] Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
[4] Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in the Lunch Mode
[5] Manual Break Mode: Operates only in the Break Mode
[6] PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period
7. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING
C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING
SETTING
Company Greeting greets all incoming callers. The System Manager or System Administrator
can choose the appropriate company greeting to each individual Time Service period (Day,
Night, Lunch, and Break) for each port and trunk (outside line) group. The default is set at the
System Greeting prior to factory shipment.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the System
Manager cannot change the Company Greeting setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this
function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [5] to change Company Greeting setting.
4. Press [1] to change the port setting, or [2] to change the trunk service setting.
5. Type 1-12 (port number) or 1-48 (trunk group number).
6. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired Time Service period entry.
•
•
•
•
[1] Day Time service
[2] Night Time service
[3] Lunch Time service
[4] Break Time service
7. The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting.
8. Press [1], [2], or [3] to choose the desired setting entry.
•
•
•
[1] To change Company Greeting number
[2] To set System Greeting—Go to Step 10
[3] To disable—Go to Step 10
9. Type the Company Greeting number 1-32.
10. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
288
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS)
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM
REPORTS)
The System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to help monitor the VPS operating
status. The reports are sent from the RS-232C port to either a printer or a terminal. (The
System Administrator is also able to output System Reports.)
Obtaining System Reports
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], or [8] to generate the desired report.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] System Service Report
[2] Disk Usage Report
[3] Port Usage Report
[4] Mailbox Usage Report
[5] Mailbox Parameter Report
[6] Call Account Report
[7] Class of Service Parameter Report
[8] Fax Call Report
Note
The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as "Mailbox Assignments". The Class
of Service Parameter Report is displayed as "COS Assignments".
4. For Disk Usage Report, Port Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report or Fax Call Report,
Press [1]. To generate the Mailbox Usage Report, Go to Step 5.
5. Mailbox Usage Report—Type the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-
digit mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System
Report Menu will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the
range, or Press [2] to obtain all mailbox usage counts. This mailbox number is the end of
the mailbox range. The mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range. For
example, to specify the mailbox range 201 through 309, enter 201 in Step 5 and 309 in Step
6.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, a System
Installation Manual
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS)
Report will not be generated. The System Report starts to be generated after the
System Administrator has completed programming and system prompt [>] is
displayed on the personal computer.
Clearing the Reports
The Port Usage, Disk Usage, Mailbox Usage, and Fax Call Reports can be cleared.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [2] to clear the Disk Usage Reports, [3] to clear the Port Usage Reports, [4] to clear
the Mailbox Usage Reports, or [8] to clear the Fax Call Report.
4. Press [2] to clear the report. To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, Go to Step 5.
5. Type the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-
digit mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System
Report Menu will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range, and Type the mailbox number of the end of the
range. Press [2] to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports.
290
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
The System Manager can deliver the same message to all or specified subscribers’ mailboxes.
When delivering a message to specified mailboxes, he can check the distribution status of
each message.
Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver the same message
to all subscribers at the same time. The message to broadcast is recorded in the System
Manager’s mailbox. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current VPS
status such as remaining hard disk capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be
erased, etc.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [1] to record a broadcast message.
4. Record a broadcast message and Press [1].
5. Press [2] to accept the message recorded.
Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscriber mailboxes by
specifying their numbers.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [2] to deliver a message.
4. Type the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
Note
Enter by name by Pressing [#] [1] first.
Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number.
5. Press [2] to accept the number if it is correct.
Note
Installation Manual
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
Press [2] to add mailbox numbers. Press [3] to review the mailing list. Press [ ]
to cancel message transfer.
6. Press [1] to record a message.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the entry.
9. Press [1] to specify the delivery time and the private status.
Note
Press [2] to send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu.
10. Press [1] to specify the delivery time.
11. Type the time and Press [#].
12. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of ’AM/PM’ in Time
13. Type the date (month and day) and Press [#].
14. Press [2] to accept the entry.
15. Press [1] to make this message private; otherwise, Press [2].
Checking Mailbox Distribution
Use this feature to check if messages have been delivered to recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to check distribution status.
3. Press [3] to cancel the message or delete verification.
Note
Press [1] to listen to messages. Press [1] twice to check the previous message.
Press [2] to check the next message.
4. Press [1] to delete verification of this message, or [2] to cancel message delivery.
292
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C9 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX
C9 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
In order to ensure system security, establish a password consisting of up to 10 numeric
characters. Anyone requesting access to the System Manager’s service will be required to
enter this password before proceeding.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the System
Manager cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customise the mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the mailbox password. If
a password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current setting.
4. Type the password and Press [#].
Note
If a password is not needed, Press [#]. It is recommended that the password be
set to maintain security.
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES
C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER
MESSAGES
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message
was recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Repeat this message
[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
[2] Play the Next Message
[3] ([1]) Erase this Message
[4] Reply
[5] Rewind
[6] Fast Forward
[7] Transfer
[8] Message Scan
294
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager’s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any Message Manager
task. To access the Message Manager’s mailbox, three items of information must be known:
the telephone number answered by Voice Mail Service, the Message Manager’s Mailbox
Number, and the Message Manager’s Password (if assigned). The Message Manager’s
Mailbox Number is 98, 998 (default), 9998, or 99998 depending upon the mailbox number
length specified in System Programming. The Message Manager’s password is assigned
through the Message Manager’s Service.
To Access the Message Manager’s Mailbox
1. Dial an Extension Number providing Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS Extension
Number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Please enter the person’s mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
2. Press [ ], then enter the Message Manager’s Mailbox Number 98, 998, 9998 or 99998.
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3. Type the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service will be
played.
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customise your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To set station call forwarding, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
296
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY
MAILBOX
One of the Message Manager’s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for
messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (System Group
Distribution Lists may be used). This can be done at any time using the telephone.
Listening to Messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his
mailbox. He can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if
necessary, transfer them to their intended recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message
was recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Repeat this Message
[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
[2] Play the Next Message
[3] ([1]) Erase this Message
[4] Reply
[5] Rewind
[6] Fast Forward
[7] Transfer
[8] Message Scan
Transferring Messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients
with voice comments attached when necessary. When a message has been transferred, we
recommend that the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [1] to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the first (next/last) message. Press [7] to transfer the message.
4. Type the destination mailbox number.
Installation Manual
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX
5. Press [2] to accept the number.
6. Press [2] to transfer with comment.
Note
Press [1] to transfer messages without comment. Press [3] to add a mailbox
number. Press [4] to review the Mailing List.
7. Record the comments and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the comments entered.
298
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION
The VPS can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his
mailbox. Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available: Notification by Message
Waiting Lamp and Notification by Calling.
Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status
The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager’s Mailbox.
Note
The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager’s
extension. However, its default extension number (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Lamp feature. When using this feature, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status, or [2] to accept it.
Setting Notification by Calling Status
The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper (pager) when a new message is recorded in the
Message Manager’s Mailbox. Set the following parameters as appropriate.
Setting Device Status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The
Message Manager cannot enable a device according to a schedule. The System Administrator
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification.
3. Press [2] to change the Device Status.
4. Type the device number (1-3).
Installation Manual
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION
Note
If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number, you
cannot set the device status. See "Assigning Notification Numbers" to assign a
telephone number.
5. Press [1], [2], or [3] to select the device status.
•
•
•
[1] Schedule (enabled on the schedule)
[2] Continuously (enabled whole day)
[3] Not Use (disabled whole day)
Assigning Notification Numbers
Up to 3 telephone or beeper (pager) numbers can be set for message notification. Use the
number keys 0 to 9, the tone/pulse switch, and the Beeper Callback Number Display Entry
Code [X] to make these assignments.
When the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper (pager) number,
the VPS will ask the caller to enter the callback number that will display on the beeper (pager).
System Programming determines if the Callback Number Entry is to be entered before, after,
or without the message.
It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not to enter a callback number. The
System Manager must authorise the use of the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [3] to assign Telephone Number.
4. Press [1] to change the first telephone number, [2] to change the second telephone
number, or [3] to change the third telephone number.
5. Press [1] to set the telephone number.
6. Type the telephone number.
7. Press [2] to accept the entry.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Change the telephone number
[2] Accept
[3] Review
[4] Add more digits
[5] Insert a pause
[6] Set dial mode
300
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION
•
•
[7] Insert a wait for dial tone
[8] Insert a beeper (pager) display command
8. Press [1] to be notified by telephone or [2] by a beeper (pager).
Installation Manual
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager is able to customise the Message Manager’s mailbox by specifying: (1)
the password; (2) the extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3; or (3) Telephone numbers 1
and 2 as the call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside
(CO) line.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the Message
Manager cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
Message Manager’s Password
The Message Manager can specify the password at any time using the telephone. The
password contains up to 10 numeric characters. It must be entered to execute the message
management operation.
Operator’s Extensions
When callers require help, they can Press [0] on their telephone keypad to be transferred to
an operator extension. In each Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Modes, up to 3 operators
(Operator 1, 2, 3) can be specified. The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day
Mode will be for the Message Manager.
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO
The customisation of the Message Manager’s mailbox only allows you to assign Telephone
number 1 and/or 2; to enable call forwarding to the telephone number assigned by following
If you should change the telephone number after you have enabled call forwarding to an
call forwarding setting; otherwise, you will be transferring calls to the old telephone number
unknowingly.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customise Mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the password. If a
password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current setting—
Go to Step 6.
4. Type the password and Press [#].
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
302
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
6. The VPS plays the current operator’s extension setting. Press [1] to change or assign the
operator’s extension. Press [2] to accept the current setting, or Press [3] to delete the
current setting—Go to Step 9.
Note
Operator 1’s extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Type the extension number.
8. The VPS plays the current extension setting. Press [2] to accept it.
9. Repeat Steps 6-8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and
Break Modes for each operator.
10. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [1] to change the telephone
number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 11. Press [2] to
accept the current setting—Go to Step 13.
11. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
•
Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code
(to seize an outside [CO] line).
•
When connected to the KX-TD500, the maximum number of characters allowed
to be entered is 24; when connected to other types of PBX, 16.
12. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
13. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [1] to change the telephone
number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 14. Press [2] to
accept the current setting.
14. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
15. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The Message Manager can set the system clock directly from the telephone. It is important to
set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery,
redialling and rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion
are all scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and System Manager are also
able to set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins
and ends.
Note
The Message Manager cannot set the system clock while:
•
•
the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer,
the System Manager sets mailboxes and Class of Service (COS), and customises
the System Manager’s Mailbox.
The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to set the time and date.
3. Press [1] to change the current setting.
4. Type the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o’clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15,
press 5, 1, 5, and #".
5. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of ’AM/PM’ in Time
6. Press [2] to accept the time.
7. Press [1] to change the current date.
8. Type the current month and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #".
9. Type the day and Press [#].
304
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
10. Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
11. Press [2] to accept the date entered.
Installation Manual
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (specifically:
menus, voice labels, user prompts, and system caller names). He is responsible for
maintaining the following:
•
Company Greetings—Up to 32 company greetings for business/non-business and Lunch/
Break hours as well as holidays can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
•
•
Company Name
The Department Dialling Menu (maximum length: 6 min)—A caller can access departments
with the touch of one key. Nine Department Dialling selections (1 to 9) can be recorded.
•
The Custom Service Menus (maximum length: 6 min each)—Up to 100 custom service
menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services they require without the
need for a human operator. This is the most useful and powerful feature of your Panasonic
Voice Processing System. For example, the Message Manager can record menus in a wide
variety of foreign languages.
•
•
* The Voice Labels (maximum length: 6 min each)—Up to 20 System Group Distribution
Lists can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice label.
The User Prompts (maximum length: 6 min each)—There are 3 kinds of voice mail prompts:
(1) System Prompts, (2) User 1 Prompts, and (3) User 2 Prompts. Generally, the System
Prompts should be left alone; they are recorded by the factory in English. However, the
Message Manager can record User 1 Prompts and User 2 Prompts in any language he
wishes.
•
•
The Multilingual Selection Menu (maximum length: 6 min)—With this menu, callers can
select the language they prefer to hear all prompts (mentioned in the previous paragraph,
"The User Prompts"). For example, the Message Manager can record a menu like this:
For English, press (7).
For Spanish, press (8).
For Chinese, press (9).
* The System Caller Names (maximum length: 4 s each)—Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can
be registered by the System Administrator. The Message Manager is responsible for
recording a name for each Caller ID number.
* While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the Message
Manager cannot record the Voice Labels and System Caller Names. The VPS plays "Sorry,
this function is not available".
Recording Menus and Voice Labels
1. Log in the Main Menu.
306
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Select the desired number to be recorded.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Record the Company Greetings.
[2] Record the Company Name.
[3] Record the Department Dialling Menu.
[4] Record the Custom Service Menus.
[5] Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists.
[7] Record the Multilingual Selection Menu.
4. For the item selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
For the Company Greetings—Enter the Company Greeting Number (1-32).
For the Company Name—Go to Step 5.
For the Department Dialling Menu—Go to Step 5.
For the Custom Service Menus—Enter a Custom Service Number (1-100).
Enter [0] to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
•
•
For the Voice Labels—Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be
labeled. (The System Administrator assigns list numbers.)
For the Multilingual Selection Menu—Go to Step 5.
5. The VPS plays the current message. Press [1] to change the message. If a message has
not yet been recorded, go to Step 7.
6. Press [1] to record the message. Press [2] to erase the current message and return to Step
3 or 4.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the message.
Note
•
•
•
Press [1] to review the recorded message.
Press [3] to erase the recorded message and try again—Return to Step 7.
Press [4] to add a message.
•
Press [ ] to erase the recorded message and exit—Return to Step 3.
9. Repeat Steps 4-8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or
Voice Labels.
Recording User Prompts
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
Installation Manual
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
3. Press [6] to modify user prompts.
4. Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or [2] to change User Prompt 2.
5. To change specific prompts, Go to Step 6.
To change all prompts in a row without reviewing the current recording, Go to Step 7.
6. To change specific prompts:
a) Press [1]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of modifiable
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded, the VPS plays
the system prompt—go to Step 6g. (If you wish to turn off a certain prompt, please first
record a "dummy" prompt. Then go back to Step 6 and you will be able to turn it off by
going through these steps.)
Note
•
Press [2] to return to Step 6b.
e) The VPS plays the current prompt. Press [1] to change the prompt.
Note
•
Press [2] to retain the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
f) Press [1] to record a new prompt.
Note
•
•
Press [2] to erase the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
Press [3] to turn off/on the specified prompt—Return to Step 6b.
g) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
h) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Note
•
•
Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 6f.
•
Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Return to Step 6b.
i) Repeat Steps 6b to 6h to record other prompts.
7. To change all prompts in a row:
a) Press [2]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of modifiable
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt.
Note
•
•
Press [2] to go to Step 7g.
Press [3] to turn off/on the prompt.
e) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
308
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
f) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Note
•
•
Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 7e.
Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Go to Step 7g.
•
g) The VPS plays the next prompt number.
h) Repeat Steps 7d to 7g to record other prompts.
Note
User prompts can be saved in a personal computer (command SAVE through the RS-
232C). Once they have been saved, they can be restored (with the command LOAD)
at any time. There is a complete list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers in
Recording System Caller Names
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [8] to modify system caller names.
*1
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number (1-120) to be modified.
Note
•
•
Enter [ ] to return to Step 3.
To record system caller names, first Caller ID numbers must be assigned (see
5. The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name. To change the name, Press [1]. If a
name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to Step 6.
Note
•
•
Press [2] to accept the current name—Return to Step 4.
Press [3] to erase the current name—Return to Step 4.
6. Record the name at the tone and Press [1].
7. The VPS plays the recorded name. Press [2] to accept it.
Note
•
•
Press [1] to change the recorded name—Return to Step 6.
Press [3] to erase the recorded name—Return to Step 4.
8. Repeat Steps 4-7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
*1
Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
Installation Manual
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
The Message Manager can program his extension (assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode)
from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone. There are six forwarding settings available:
•
•
FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number.
FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is
busy.
•
•
•
•
FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there is
no answer.
FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when
the line is busy or there is no answer.
FWD to CO—Forward all incoming calls to Telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in
the Mailbox Setting), or to any other telephone number.
FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding setting.
Notes
•
•
The Remote Call Forwarding Set feature is available with DPT Integration only.
By default, the extension number for the Message Manager’s extension (assigned
for Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be
used with this feature. When using this feature, you must assign the extension
number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
•
FWD to CO must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilised
Assigning the Remote Call Forwarding Set
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] to set Remote Call Forwarding.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to select the desired forwarding setting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] FWD All
[2] FWD Busy
[3] FWD No Answer
[4] FWD Busy or No Answer
[5] FWD to CO
[6] FWD Cancel
310
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
4. For the items selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
•
•
For FWD All—Go to Step 5.
For FWD Busy—Go to Step 5.
For FWD No Answer—Go to Step 5.
For FWD Busy or No Answer—Go to Step 5.
For FWD to CO—Go to Step 7.
For FWD Cancel—Go to Step 10.
5. Type the extension number.
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the extension number—Return to Step 5.
7. Press [1] or [2] to select Telephone number 1 or Telephone number 2 (Go to Step 9), or
Press [3] to select another telephone number.
8. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
•
Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code
(to seize an outside [CO] line).
•
When connected to the KX-TD500, the maximum number of characters allowed
to be entered is 24; when connected to other types of PBX, 16.
9. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the telephone number. Return to Step 7.
10. Call Forwarding is cancelled. Press [2] to accept it.
11. Call Forwarding setting data is transmitted to the PBX. If the forwarding setting or
cancelling has been completed properly, you will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call
forwarding is cancelled".
Note
If you hear "Call Forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination number", the
forwarding setting has not been completed properly at the PBX, possibly because a
nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. It is also
possible that the model of the connected PBX does not support the Remote Call
Forwarding Set feature, or its software version is lower than required; for more
information, consult your dealer.
Installation Manual
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND
AA SERVICE
There are over 900 voice prompts (all listed in the next section) and they come in 3 types.
(1) System Prompts—in English (cannot be modified)
(2) User 1 Prompts—recordable
(3) User 2 Prompts—in Spanish (can be erased or modified)
However, in many cases it is not necessary to record all the voice prompts (recording over 900
voice prompts is a big undertaking). When an outside party calls AA service or VM service, he
only hears some of the following prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or
modify) these prompts. Please change prompts as needed for your application. For example,
prompt no. [915] could be "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the
Voice Processing System". (The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 min.)
Note
To identify the prompt(s) linked to each prompt listed below, refer to the next section,
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Table D-1
Prompt No.
273
Modifiable Prompts
Good afternoon
Good evening
Good morning
274
275
915
752
152
221
222
556
564
303
299
678
60
Welcome to the Voice Processing System
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s last name
For ’Q’, press 7
For ’Z’, press 9
Sorry, there are no more matching names
Sorry, this name cannot be found
Incorrect entry
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line
To call the operator, press 0
Calling the operator
467
914
466
Please wait a moment
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
Please leave a message at the tone
312
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE
Modifiable Prompts
Table D-1
Prompt No.
744
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
789
819
663
755
674
754
To pause and restart recording, press 2
To review, press 1
To accept, press 2
To erase and try again, press 3
To add, press 4
To erase and exit, press
To make this message private, press 1
Otherwise, press 2
783
432
590
Thank you for calling
VM Prompts
Table D-2
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
463
Please enter the person’s mailbox number
AA Prompts
Table D-3
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
Please enter the person’s extension
You have a call
462
921
553
781
749
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
To leave a message, press 1
To enter another extension, press
Sorry, this line is busy
561
302
683
If you would like to hold, press 1
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I’ll try your party again
Installation Manual
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
The table below shows the modifiable prompts. Record prompts as User 1 or User 2. Some of
the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number. Whenever possible,
record related prompts together so that the assembled sentence flows naturally and sounds
like one voice.
If you wish to change some of service prompts to User 1 or User 2, but not all of them, please
see the following sections:
•
•
•
•
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
1
1 through (number)
[ 1]
2
20 members maximum
8 members maximum
[560], [ 2]
[560], [ 3]
[ 4]
3
4
After hours greeting is (message)
5
After hours greeting is not recorded [ 5]
6
All pager entry modes are disabled
All caller ID numbers deleted
[ 6]
[ 7]
7
8
All calls transfer to mailbox disabled [ 8]
All calls transfer to mailbox enabled [ 9]
9
10
11
12
13
14
All mailboxes are assigned
[ 10]
All messages erased
[ 11]
[ 12]
[ 13]
[ 14]
All transfer services disabled
AM
and
[359], [ 15], [ 14]
[367], [ 14]
15
and transferred via (mailbox number) [359], [ 15], [ 14]
[ 15]
16
17
Answer length is (number)
[ 16], [507]
[ 17]
Any digit on the telephone keypad
can be used
18
APRIL
[ 18]
314
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
19
at
[ 19]
[654], [ 19]
[345], [483], [ 19]
[365], [ 19], [220], [284]
[365], [ 19], [220], [283]
[182], [420], [ 19]
[360], [ 19]
[346], [912], [ 19]
[183], [ 19]
[360], [ 19], [220], [284]
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
(number) attempts were busy
[ 20]
[ 21]
(number) attempts were no answer
(number) attempts were successful [ 22]
AUGUST
[ 23]
Auto forwarding disabled
Auto forwarding enabled
[ 24]
[ 25]
because message retention time
expired
[181], [911], [ 26]
27
28
29
Pager access disabled
Pager access enabled
[ 27]
[ 28]
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 29]
after message recording
30
31
32
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 30]
before message recording
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 31]
caller select
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 32]
without message
33
34
being delivered now
[366], [ 33]
Break mode first operator’s extension [ 34]
is (extension number)
35
36
37
Break mode first operator’s extension [ 35]
is not assigned
Break mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[ 36]
[ 37]
Break mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
Installation Manual
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
38
Break mode third operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[ 38]
[ 39]
[ 40]
39
Break mode third operator’s
extension is not assigned
40
41
42
43
44
45
Busy signal greeting is (message)
Busy signal greeting is not recorded [ 41]
Call blocking enabled
[ 42]
[ 43]
[ 44]
[ 45]
Call forwarding accepted
Call forwarding is cancelled
Call forwarding not accepted
Please check the destination number
46
47
Call screening enabled
[ 46]
[ 47]
Call transferred from the voice
processing system
48
49
CALLBACK NUMBER
Caller ID (number)
[ 48]
[ 49], [277]
[ 49], [278]
50
51
Caller ID number and caller name
deleted
[ 50]
Caller ID number entries for this box [ 51]
are full, there are 30 entries for caller
ID allowed
52
53
Caller ID number is (telephone
number)
[ 52]
[ 52], [722], [663]
Caller ID number is not assigned
[ 53]
[ 53], [722], [432]
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Caller ID numbers assigned
Caller ID screen disabled
Caller ID screen enabled
Caller name is (name)
Caller name is erased
Caller name is not recorded
Calling the operator
[601], [ 54]
[ 55]
[ 56]
[ 57]
[ 58]
[ 59]
[ 60], [467]
[ 61]
Cannot be retrieved
316
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
62
Class of service number is (number) [ 62], [643]
[ 62], [644]
[ 62]
63
64
Company greeting number (number) [ 63], [178]
Company greeting number is
(number)
[ 64]
65
66
67
68
Company name (name)
Company name erased
Counts cleared
[ 65]
[ 66]
[ 67]
[ 68]
Covering extension is (extension
number)
69
70
71
72
Covering extension not assigned
[ 69]
Covering extension transfer disabled [ 70]
Covering extension transfer enabled [ 71]
Current company greeting setting is [ 72]
disabled
73
74
75
Current company greeting setting is [ 73]
number (number)
Current company greeting setting is [ 74]
System Greeting
Current service mode for Time Group [ 75], [312]
number (number)
[ 75], [314]
[ 75], [316]
[ 75], [315]
[ 75], [313]
[ 75], [317]
76
Custom service menu
[ 76]
[ 76], [178]
77
78
79
Custom service number (number)
Date is (date)
[ 77]
[ 78]
Day mode first operator’s extension is [ 79]
(extension number)
80
81
Day mode first operator’s extension is [ 80]
not assigned
Day mode second operator’s
[ 81]
extension is (extension number)
Installation Manual
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
82
Day mode second operator’s
[ 82]
extension is not assigned
83
84
85
Day mode third operator’s extension [ 83]
is (extension number)
Day mode third operator’s extension [ 84]
is not assigned
days
[ 85]
[381], [ 85]
[502], [ 85]
86
87
DECEMBER
[ 86]
Delay time is (time)
[ 87], [289], [374]
[ 87], [289]
[ 87], [374]
88
89
Delete message confirmation
disabled
[ 88]
Delete message confirmation
enabled
[ 89]
90
91
92
93
94
95
deleted
[329], [ 90]
[ 91]
Delivering message to (name)
Delivery list number is (number)
Department dialling menu erased
[ 92]
[ 93]
Department dialling menu is (menu) [ 94]
Device notification for unreceived
message disabled
[ 95]
96
Device notification for unreceived
message enabled
[ 96]
97
98
99
Device number is (number)
DIAL TONE
[ 97]
[ 98]
digits
[151], [918], [ 99]
[461], [918], [ 99]
[461], [918], [ 99], [916]
[139], [918], [ 99]
[168], [918], [ 99]
100
101
102
103
Direct mailbox access disabled
Direct mailbox access enabled
EIGHT
[100]
[101]
[102]
[103]
EIGHT [HOUR]
318
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
EIGHTEEN
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
[104]
[105]
[106]
[107]
[108]
[109]
[110]
[111]
[112]
[113]
[114]
[115]
[116]
[117]
[118]
[119]
[120]
[121]
[122]
[123]
EIGHTEEN [HOUR]
EIGHTEEN [MINUTE]
EIGHTEENTH
EIGHTH
EIGHTY
EIGHTY EIGHT
EIGHTY FIVE
EIGHTY FOUR
EIGHTY NINE
EIGHTY ONE
EIGHTY SEVEN
EIGHTY SIX
EIGHTY THREE
EIGHTY TWO
ELEVEN
ELEVEN [HOUR]
ELEVEN [MINUTE]
ELEVENTH
Enter 1 for AM, or 2 for PM
Enter a class of service number from [124]
1 to 62
125
Enter a class of service number from [125]
1 to 64
126
127
128
129
Enter a group number from 1 to 17
Enter a group number, 1 through 4
Enter a mailbox list number
[126]
[127]
[128]
Enter a message length from 1 to 6 [129]
minutes or 0 for unlimited length
130
131
132
Enter a message retention time up to [130]
30 days
Enter a message retention time up to [131]
30 days or 0 for unlimited days
Enter a personal greeting length from [132]
8 to 60 seconds
Installation Manual
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
133
Enter delivery list number 1 or 2
Enter device number, 1 through 3
Enter extension number
[133]
[134]
[135]
134
135
136
Enter question number, followed by [136]
the hash sign
137
138
Enter question number, followed by [137]
the pound sign
Enter the 4 digits password
[138], [840]
[138], [839]
[139], [918], [ 99]
139
140
Enter the caller ID number
Enter the caller name announcement [140]
number 1 through 120
141
142
Enter the company greeting number 1 [141]
through 32
Enter the custom service prompt
number 1 through 100
[142]
To record custom service exit prompt,
press 0
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
Enter the day of the month, followed [143]
by the hash sign
Enter the day of the month, followed [144]
by the pound sign
Enter the day, followed by the hash [145]
sign
Enter the day, followed by the pound [146]
sign
Enter the delay time, followed by the [147]
hash sign
Enter the delay time, followed by the [148]
pound sign
Enter the destination extension
number for forwarding
[149]
Enter the destination mailbox number [150], [752]
[150], [751]
151
152
Enter the destination telephone
number for forwarding
[151], [918], [99]
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the
person’s last name
[152], [221], [222]
[152]
320
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
153
Enter the first 4 letters of the owner’s [153]
last name
154
155
Enter the interview mailbox number [154]
Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the hash sign
[155]
156
157
Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the pound sign
[156]
Enter the mailbox number
[157]
[157], [908]
[157], [909]
158
159
Enter the maximum number of caller [158]
IDs for caller name announce
Valid entries are from 0 to 30
Enter the maximum number of
messages per mailbox
[159]
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
160
161
162
163
164
Enter the month, followed by the hash [160], [232]
sign
Enter the month, followed by the
pound sign
[161], [232]
Enter the new time, followed by the [162], [232]
hash sign
Enter the new time, followed by the [163], [232]
pound sign
Enter the operator’s extension
[164]
number
165
166
167
168
169
Enter the owner’s extension number [165]
Enter the port number
[166], [272]
[167]
[168], [918], [99]
Enter the prompt number
Enter the telephone number
Enter the telephone number and wait. [169]
To insert a pause or special
command, enter the partial number
and wait for the options menu
170
171
Enter the Time Group number 1
through 8
[170]
Enter the time, followed by the hash [171], [232]
sign
[171], [740], [232]
Installation Manual
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
172
Enter the time, followed by the pound [172], [232]
sign
[172], [741], [232]
173
Enter the total message time
available per mailbox.
[173]
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes or 0 for unlimited time
174
175
Enter the trunk group number
[174], [272]
Enter your party’s mailbox number
[175], [752]
[175], [751]
176
177
178
Enter your password, followed by the [176]
hash sign
[176], [839]
Enter your password, followed by the [177]
pound sign
[177], [840]
erased
[ 63], [178]
[ 76], [178]
179
180
Extension (extension number)
[179]
[180]
Extension number (extension
number)
181
182
External delivery message for (name) [181], [911], [ 26]
External delivery message scheduled [182], [420], [ 19]
for (name)
183
184
185
External delivery message scheduled [183], [ 19]
on (date)
External delivery message will be
sent right away
[184]
External delivery message will be
sent to (name)
[185], [500]
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
External message delivery disabled [186]
External message delivery enabled [187]
FAX messages
FEBRUARY
FIFTEEN
[920], [188]
[189]
[190]
[191]
[192]
[193]
[194]
[195]
FIFTEEN [HOUR]
FIFTEEN [MINUTE]
FIFTEENTH
FIFTH
FIFTY
322
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
FIFTY [MINUTE]
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
[196]
[197]
[198]
[199]
[200]
[201]
[202]
[203]
[204]
[205]
[206]
[207]
[208]
[209]
[210]
[211]
[212]
[213]
[214]
[215]
FIFTY EIGHT
FIFTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
FIFTY FIVE
FIFTY FIVE [MINUTE]
FIFTY FOUR
FIFTY FOUR [MINUTE]
FIFTY NINE
FIFTY NINE [MINUTE]
FIFTY ONE
FIFTY ONE [MINUTE]
FIFTY SEVEN
FIFTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
FIFTY SIX
FIFTY SIX [MINUTE]
FIFTY THREE
FIFTY THREE [MINUTE]
FIFTY TWO
FIFTY TWO [MINUTE]
FIRST
First telephone number is (telephone [216]
number)
217
First telephone number is not
assigned
[217]
218
219
220
FIVE
[218]
[219]
[220]
FIVE [HOUR]
for
[365], [ 19], [220], [284]
[365], [ 19], [220], [283]
[360], [ 19], [220], [284]
221
222
223
For ’Q’, press 7
[152], [221], [222]
For ’Z’, press 9
[152], [221], [222]
For a system report, press 5
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
Installation Manual
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
224
For automated attendant status,
press 4
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [746]
225
For Day time, press 1
For Night time, press 2
For Lunch time, press 3
For Break time, press 4
[225]
226
227
[462], [752], [226]
[462], [751], [226]
For department dialling, press
For example, to enter 5 o’clock press [227]
5 and the hash sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the hash sign
228
For example, to enter 5 o’clock press [228]
5 and the pound sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the pound sign
229
230
231
232
For example, to enter January, press [229]
1 and the hash sign
For example, to enter January, press [230]
1 and the pound sign
For external message delivery, press [231]
3
For help, press 0
[172], [232]
[172], [741], [232]
[804], [793], [756], [813], [846], [232]
[804], [793], [756], [846], [232]
[163], [232]
[161], [232]
[171], [232]
[171], [740], [232]
[162], [232]
[160], [232]
233
234
For interview mailbox management, [233]
press 1
For mailbox management, press 5
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [746]
235
236
For notification by telephone, press 1 [235]
For notification by pager, press 2
For other features, press 6
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
237
For Port setting, press 1
[237]
For Trunk service setting, press 2
324
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[662], [238], [805], [748]
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
For the next name, press 2
FORTY
[239]
[240]
[241]
[242]
[243]
[244]
[245]
[246]
[247]
[248]
[249]
[250]
[251]
[252]
[253]
[254]
[255]
[256]
[257]
[258]
[259]
FORTY [MINUTE]
FORTY EIGHT
FORTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
FORTY FIVE
FORTY FIVE [MINUTE]
FORTY FOUR
FORTY FOUR [MINUTE]
FORTY NINE
FORTY NINE [MINUTE]
FORTY ONE
FORTY ONE [MINUTE]
FORTY SEVEN
FORTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
FORTY SIX
FORTY SIX [MINUTE]
FORTY THREE
FORTY THREE [MINUTE]
FORTY TWO
FORTY TWO [MINUTE]
Forwarding mailbox number is
(mailbox number)
260
Forwarding mailbox number is not
assigned
[260]
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
Forwarding mode is copy
Forwarding mode is move
FOUR
[261]
[262]
[263]
[264]
[265]
[266]
[267]
[268]
FOUR [HOUR]
FOURTEEN
FOURTEEN [HOUR]
FOURTEEN [MINUTE]
FOURTEENTH
Installation Manual
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
269
FOURTH
FRIDAY
[269]
[270]
270
271
from (name)
[635], [271]
[291], [271]
[292], [271]
272
273
274
275
from 1 to
[166], [272]
[174], [272]
Good afternoon
Good evening
Good morning
[273], [915]
[273]
[274], [915]
[274]
[275], [915]
[275]
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
Greeting erased
[276]
greeting is (message)
greeting is not recorded
Group member deleted
Group name erased
[ 49], [277]
[ 49], [278]
[279]
[280]
Group name not recorded
Group number (number)
[281]
[282]
has been erased, because message [365], [ 19], [220], [283]
retention time expired
284
has not been received
[365], [ 19], [220], [284]
[360], [ 19], [220], [284]
285
286
HASH(#)
[285]
[286]
Hello, this is the voice processing
system
287
Hello, this is the voice processing
system
[287]
The system Cooling fan has stopped
Please call for engineer
288
Hello, this is the voice processing
system
[288]
Available memory space is less than
20 %
Please erase unnecessary messages
326
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
hours (time)
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[ 87], [289], [374]
289
[ 87], [289]
290
291
HUNDRED
[290]
I have a call for (name)
[291]
[291], [271]
292
293
I have a call for mailbox (mailbox
number)
[292]
[292], [271]
I have a message for (name)
[293], [798], [775]
[293], [798], [775], [301]
294
295
296
297
298
299
I was unable to reach (name)
I’ll notify by pager
[294]
[295]
I’ll notify by telephone
I’ll redial (number)
[296]
[297], [379]
[298]
I’ll redial only once
If you are using a rotary telephone,
stay on the line
[299], [678]
[299]
300
301
If you really want to erase, press 1
If not, press 2
[300]
If you want me to call back later,
press 3
[293], [798], [775], [301]
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
If you would like to hold, press 1
Incorrect entry
[302], [432]
[303]
Initialisation completed
Initialisation failed
[304]
[305]
Intercom paging disabled
Intercom paging enabled
[306]
[307]
Intercom paging group number is
(number)
[308]
309
Interview mailbox number is (mailbox [309]
number)
310
311
Interview mailbox number is deleted [310]
Interview mailbox number is not
assigned
[311]
312
313
is Automatic mode
[ 75], [312]
[ 75], [313]
is Manual Break mode
Installation Manual
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
314
is Manual Day mode
is Manual Lunch mode
is Manual Night mode
is PBX Control mode
JANUARY
[ 75], [314]
[ 75], [315]
[ 75], [316]
[ 75], [317]
[318]
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
JULY
[319]
JUNE
[320]
Leaving a message is disabled
Leaving a message is enabled
[321]
[322]
Lunch Mode first operator’s extension [323]
is (extension number)
324
325
326
327
328
329
Lunch Mode first operator’s extension [324]
is not assigned
Lunch Mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[325]
[326]
[327]
[328]
Lunch Mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
Lunch Mode third operator’s
extension is (extension number)
Lunch Mode third operator’s
extension is not assigned
Mailbox
[329]
[329], [ 90]
330
331
332
333
334
335
Mailbox is in use
[330]
[331]
[332]
[333]
[334]
[335]
Mailbox list label erased
Mailbox list number (number)
Mailbox number already specified
MARCH
Maximum number of caller IDs for
caller name announce is (number)
336
Maximum number of messages per [336]
mailbox is (number)
337
338
339
340
MAY
[337]
[338]
[339]
[340]
(number) members maximum
Message back up disabled
Message back up enabled
328
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
341
Message cancel for live call
screening disabled
[341]
[342]
342
Message cancel for live call
screening enabled
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
Message delivery cancelled
Message erased
[343]
[344]
Message for (name)
Message from (name)
[345], [483], [ 19]
[346], [912], [ 19]
Message from the interview mailbox [347]
Message from the Message Manager [348]
Message from the System Manager [349]
Message length is (time)
Message length is unlimited
Message Manager
[350], [374]
[351]
[352]
[353]
[354]
Message notification disabled
Message notification enabled
Message reception mode is interview [355]
mode
356
357
358
359
360
Message reception mode is message [356]
recording mode
Message reception mode is set to
interview mode
[357]
Message reception mode is set to
message recording mode
[358]
Message recorded by (mailbox
number)
[359], [ 15], [ 14]
[360], [ 19]
Message recorded on (date)
[360], [ 19], [220], [284]
361
362
363
364
Message retrieval order is first-in-
first-out
[361]
Message retrieval order is last-in-first- [362]
out
Message scanning with information is [363]
disabled
Message scanning with information is [364]
enabled
Installation Manual
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[365], [ 19], [220], [284]
365
Message sent on (date)
[365], [ 19], [220], [283]
366
367
Message to (name)
[366], [ 33]
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[367], [ 14]
368
369
370
371
372
Message waiting lamp notification
disabled
[368]
[369]
Message waiting lamp notification
enabled
Message waiting lamp notification for [370]
unreceived message disabled
Message waiting lamp notification for [371]
unreceived message enabled
Messages
[372]
[920], [372]
373
374
(number) messages to verify
minutes
[373]
[374]
[350], [374]
[857], [374]
[ 87], [289], [374]
[ 87], [374]
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
MONDAY
[375]
more caller ID numbers
more members
[917], [376]
[917], [377]
[378]
MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED
more times
[297], [379]
[380]
New message
New message retention time is (day) [381], [ 85]
new messages [920], [382]
Night mode first operator’s extension [383]
is (extension number)
384
385
386
Night mode first operator’s extension [384]
is not assigned
Night mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[385]
[386]
Night mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
330
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
387
Night mode third operator’s extension [387]
is (extension number)
388
Night mode third operator’s extension [388]
is not assigned
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
NINE
[389]
[390]
[391]
[392]
[393]
[394]
[395]
[396]
[397]
[398]
[399]
[400]
[401]
[402]
[403]
[404]
[405]
[406]
NINE [HOUR]
NINETEEN
NINETEEN [HOUR]
NINETEEN [MINUTE]
NINETEENTH
NINETY
NINETY EIGHT
NINETY FIVE
NINETY FOUR
NINETY NINE
NINETY ONE
NINETY SEVEN
NINETY SIX
NINETY THREE
NINETY TWO
NINTH
No answer greeting is (message)
No answer greeting is not recorded [407]
No external delivery message
pending
[408]
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
No letters have been specified
No messages to verify
No more messages
No one specified by this number
No previous message
No question recorded
NOVEMBER
[409]
[410]
[411]
[412]
[413]
[414]
[415]
[416]
[417]
O’CLOCK
OCTOBER
Installation Manual
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
418
of (company name)
[652], [418]
[419]
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
Old message
on (date)
[182], [420], [ 19]
[421]
ONE
ONE [HOUR]
[422]
One attempt was busy
One attempt was no answer
One attempt was successful
One message to verify
One other person is queing
Only extension call is available
Operator transfer disabled
Operator transfer enabled
(number) other people are queing
Otherwise, press 2
[423]
[424]
[425]
[426]
[427]
[550], [428], [465]
[429]
[430]
[431]
[753], [432]
[783], [432]
[591], [722], [432]
[727], [432]
[302], [432]
[592], [722], [432]
[730], [432]
[807], [432]
[729], [432]
[ 53], [722], [432]
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
OWE
[433]
[434]
[435]
[436]
[437]
[438]
[439]
[440]
[441]
[442]
OWE EIGHT
OWE FIVE
OWE FOUR
OWE NINE
OWE ONE
OWE SEVEN
OWE SIX
OWE THREE
OWE TWO
332
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
443
Owner’s extension is (extension
number)
[443]
[444]
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
Owner’s extension is not assigned
Owner’s extension number is deleted [445]
Owner’s name erased
Owner’s name is (name)
Owner’s name is deleted
Owner’s name is not recorded
Password deleted
[446]
[447]
[448]
[449]
[450]
[451]
Password entry failure
Check the password
452
453
454
455
Password is (number)
Password not assigned
PAUSE
[452]
[453]
[454]
[455]
Personal greeting for caller ID
disabled
456
Personal greeting for caller ID
enabled
[456]
457
458
Personal greeting length is (time)
[457], [507]
[458]
Play system prompt after personal
greeting disabled
459
Play system prompt after personal
greeting enabled
[459]
[460]
460
461
Please call (telephone number)
Please enter your callback number
[461], [918], [ 99]
[461], [918], [ 99], [916]
Please enter the person’s extension [462], [752]
[462], [752], [226]
462
463
464
[462], [751]
[462], [751], [226]
Please enter the person’s mailbox
number
[463], [752]
[463], [752], [678]
[463], [751]
[463], [751], [678]
Please hold while I page the person [464]
Installation Manual
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
465
Please inform System Manager
[559], [465]
[550], [428], [465]
Please leave a message at the tone [466]
466
467
Please wait a moment
[467]
[ 60], [467]
468
469
470
471
PM
[468]
[469]
[470]
Port number is (number)
POUND(#)
Prompt mode for external message [471]
delivery is caller select
472
473
474
Prompt mode for external message [472]
delivery is system
Prompt mode for external message [473]
delivery is user 1
Prompt mode for external message [474]
delivery is user 2
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
Prompt mode is system
[475]
Prompt mode is user 1
[476]
Prompt mode is user 2
[477]
Prompt number (number)
Prompt restored
[478]
[479]
PULSE DIALLING MODE
Question erased
[480]
[481]
Question number (number)
received on (date)
[482]
[345], [483], [ 19]
[484]
Record caller name at the tone
Record company name at the tone
Record greeting at the tone
Record label at the tone
Record menu at the tone
Record owner’s name at the tone
Record the group name at the tone
Record the prompt at the tone
Record the question at the tone
[485]
[836]
[487]
[488]
[489]
[490]
[491]
[492]
334
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
493
Record the recipient’s name at the
[493]
tone
494
495
496
497
498
Record your name at the tone
Recording accepted
[494]
[495]
Remote Call Forward to CO disabled [496]
Remote Call Forward to CO enabled [497]
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service disabled
[498]
499
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service enabled
[499]
500
501
502
right away
[185], [500]
[501]
SATURDAY
Saved message retention time is
(day)
[502], [ 85]
503
Saved message retention time is
unlimited
[503]
504
505
SECOND
[504]
[505]
Second telephone number is
(telephone number)
506
507
Second telephone number is not
assigned
[506]
seconds
[507]
[ 16], [507]
[457], [507]
508
509
510
511
Selection Menu
[508]
[509]
Selection menu erased
Selection menu is (selection menu) [510]
Sending report now to terminal or
printer connected to RS-232C port
[511]
512
513
SEPTEMBER
[512]
[513]
Set the answer length using the
following options
For 4 seconds, press 1
For 8 seconds, press 2
For 16 seconds, press 3
For 32 seconds, press 4
514
515
SEVEN
[514]
[515]
SEVEN [HOUR]
Installation Manual
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
516
SEVENTEEN
SEVENTEEN [HOUR]
SEVENTEEN [MINUTE]
SEVENTEENTH
SEVENTH
[516]
[517]
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[524]
[525]
[526]
[527]
[528]
[529]
[530]
[531]
[532]
[533]
[534]
[535]
[536]
[537]
[538]
[539]
[540]
[541]
[542]
[543]
[544]
[545]
[546]
[547]
[548]
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
SEVENTY
SEVENTY EIGHT
SEVENTY FIVE
SEVENTY FOUR
SEVENTY NINE
SEVENTY ONE
SEVENTY SEVEN
SEVENTY SIX
SEVENTY THREE
SEVENTY TWO
SIX
SIX [HOUR]
SIXTEEN
SIXTEEN [HOUR]
SIXTEEN [MINUTE]
SIXTEENTH
SIXTH
SIXTY
SIXTY EIGHT
SIXTY FIVE
SIXTY FOUR
SIXTY NINE
SIXTY ONE
SIXTY SEVEN
SIXTY SIX
SIXTY THREE
SIXTY TWO
Sorry
336
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
549
550
551
Sorry, I cannot add any more
Sorry, I cannot call this number
[549]
[550], [428], [465]
[551]
Sorry, mailbox in use, cannot be
deleted
552
553
Sorry, maximum of 20 destinations
exceeded
[552]
Sorry, no one is available to answer [553]
the call
554
555
Sorry, no space for recording
[554]
[555]
Sorry, Operator is not available to
answer the call
Please call back later
556
Sorry, there are no more matching
names
[556]
[556], [849]
557
558
Sorry, there is no space for recording [557]
Sorry, there is no space for recording [558]
in this mailbox
559
560
Sorry, this function is not available
[559], [465]
[559]
Sorry, this group is full
[560], [ 3]
[560], [ 2]
561
562
Sorry, this line is busy
[561]
[562]
Sorry, this list is in use for delivery
If this list is edited, all the deliveries
will then be cancelled
563
564
565
566
567
568
Sorry, this mailbox is in use
[563]
[564]
[565]
[566]
[567]
[568]
Sorry, this name cannot be found
Sorry, this number is not assigned
Sorry, this pager is not available
Sorry, this report is not available
Sorry, you cannot deliver the
message
The maximum number of delivery has
already been reached
569
Sorry, you cannot reply
[569], [597]
[569], [653]
[569], [649]
Installation Manual
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
570
Sorry, you cannot transfer a private [570]
message
571
[571]
STAR( )
572
573
574
State your comment at the tone
SUNDAY
[572], [745], [789]
[573]
Telephone number 1 for Remote Call [574]
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
575
576
Telephone number 1 for Remote Call [575]
Forward to CO is not assigned
Telephone number 1 is (telephone
number)
[576]
577
578
Telephone number 1 is not assigned [577]
Telephone number 2 for Remote Call [578]
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
579
580
Telephone number 2 for Remote Call [579]
Forward to CO is not assigned
Telephone number 2 is (telephone
number)
[580]
581
582
583
Telephone number 2 is not assigned [581]
Telephone number deleted
[582]
[583]
Telephone number is (telephone
number)
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
Telephone number is not assigned
TEN
[584]
[585]
TEN [HOUR]
[586]
TEN [MINUTE]
TENTH
[587]
[588]
Thank you
[589]
Thank you for calling
[590]
The callback number is (telephone
number)
[591], [722], [432]
592
593
The callback number is not assigned [592], [722], [432]
The FAX transfer situation is as
follows
[593]
594
The first 4 letters of the owner’s last [594]
name are (name)
338
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
595
The mailbox number entry failure
Check the mailbox number
[595]
596
597
598
599
600
The message is (message)
The message sender is unknown
The prompt is now turned off
The prompt is now turned on
[596]
[569], [597]
[598]
[599]
The system-reserved mailbox cannot [600]
be edited
601
602
603
There are (number)
[601], [ 54]
[602]
There are no messages
There was one unsuccessful attempt [603]
to enter this mailbox
604
605
There were (number of failure)
[604], [905]
These are the brief segments of your [605]
Message
606
607
THIRD
[606]
Third telephone number is (telephone [607]
number)
608
Third telephone number is not
assigned
[608]
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
THIRTEEN
[609]
[610]
[611]
[612]
[613]
[614]
[615]
[616]
[617]
[618]
[619]
[620]
[621]
[622]
[623]
THIRTEEN [HOUR]
THIRTEEN [MINUTE]
THIRTEENTH
THIRTIETH
THIRTY
THIRTY [MINUTE]
THIRTY EIGHT
THIRTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
THIRTY FIRST
THIRTY FIVE
THIRTY FIVE [MINUTE]
THIRTY FOUR
THIRTY FOUR [MINUTE]
THIRTY NINE
Installation Manual
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
624
THIRTY NINE [MINUTE]
THIRTY ONE
[624]
[625]
[626]
[627]
[628]
[629]
[630]
[631]
[632]
[633]
[634]
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
THIRTY ONE [MINUTE]
THIRTY SEVEN
THIRTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
THIRTY SIX
THIRTY SIX [MINUTE]
THIRTY THREE
THIRTY THREE [MINUTE]
THIRTY TWO
THIRTY TWO [MINUTE]
This call is for (name)
[635]
[635], [271]
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
This call is from (name)
[636]
This caller ID number already exists [637]
This device is for continuous use
This device is for scheduled use
This device is not to be used
This group has no members
This is a new mailbox
[638]
[639]
[640]
[641]
[642]
This is for Message Manager
This is for System Manager
[ 62], [643]
[ 62], [644]
This is the General Delivery Mailbox [645]
This is the last message
This is the last prompt number
This is your mailbox
[646]
[647]
[648]
This is your message
[569], [649]
[650]
This list member already exists
This mailbox number is already
assigned
[651]
652
653
This message is from (name)
[652], [418]
[652]
This message is from the general
delivery mailbox
[569], [653]
340
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
654
This message will be delivered on
(day)
[654], [ 19]
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
THOUSAND
[655]
THREE
[656]
THREE [HOUR]
THURSDAY
[657]
[658]
Time is (time)
times
[659]
[859], [660]
To accept the prompt, press 2
To accept, press 1
To accept, press 2
[819], [661], [755], [754]
[662], [238], [805], [748]
[819], [663], [755], [674], [754]
[828], [663]
[722], [663]
[819], [663], [755]
[712], [663], [820]
[722], [663], [737]
[722], [663], [759]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
[722], [663], [808]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
[ 52], [722], [663]
664
To accept, press 4
[672], [736], [820], [664]
[853], [854], [855], [664]
665
666
To accept, press 5
[853], [854], [855], [782], [665]
To add group members, press 2
[690], [666]
[690], [666], [732], [818]
667
668
To add more caller ID numbers, press [667], [747]
1
To add more digits, press 4
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
669
670
To add more members, press 1
[669], [747]
To add new mailbox number, press 3 [848], [670], [817]
[848], [847], [670], [817]
Installation Manual
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
671
To add new member, press 1
To add, press 1
[671]
[671], [732], [820]
672
[672]
[672], [736], [820]
[672], [736], [820], [664]
[672], [723], [737], [821]
673
674
675
To add, press 2
To add, press 4
[722], [673]
[819], [663], [755], [674], [754]
[675]
To answer the call, press 1
Otherwise, press 2 and hang up
676
To assign or edit mailboxes, press 1 [676]
To delete mailboxes, press 2
To reset mailbox passwords, press 3
677
678
To call message sender, press 1
To record a message, press 2
[677]
To call the operator, press 0
[299], [678]
[463], [752], [678]
[678]
[463], [751], [678]
679
680
To call this person, press 1
[679], [720], [849]
[680]
To cancel, press
To continue, press 1
681
To cancel call forwarding, press 6
[761], [762], [764], [763], [765], [681]
[761], [762], [764], [763], [681]
682
683
684
685
686
To cancel external message delivery, [682], [716]
press 1
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I’ll try your party again
[683]
[684]
[685]
To cancel mailing list review, press
any key
To cancel this message or
verification, press 3
To change caller ID greeting number [686]
1, press 1
To change caller ID greeting number
2, press 2
To change caller ID greeting number
3, press 3
To change caller ID greeting number
4, press 4
342
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
687
To change caller ID number, press 1 [687]
To change caller name, press 2
To accept, press 3
688
To change company greeting
number, press 1
[688]
To set system greeting, press 2
To disable, press 3
689
690
To change company greeting setting, [837], [827], [834], [692], [689]
press 5
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689], [776]
To change group name, press 1
[690], [666]
[690], [666], [732], [818]
691
692
To change Remote Call Forwarding [709], [708], [706], [836], [698], [691]
to CO setting, press 6
To change service mode setting,
press 4
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689], [776]
693
694
To change Telephone number 1,
press 1
To change Telephone number 2,
press 2
[693]
To change the after hours greeting, [705], [696], [694]
press 3
[705], [696], [694], [697]
695
696
To change the answer length, press 1 [695], [841], [842], [774]
To change the busy signal greeting, [705], [696], [694]
press 2
[705], [696], [694], [697]
697
698
To change the caller ID greetings,
press 4
[705], [696], [694], [697]
To change the caller name and
number, press 5
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698], [691]
699
700
701
To change the company greeting,
press 1
[699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
To change the company name, press [699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
2
To change the custom service menu, [699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
press 4
[702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
702
To change the department dialling
menu, press 3
[699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
[702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
Installation Manual
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
703
To change the first telephone
number, press 1
[703]
To change the second telephone
number, press 2
To change the third telephone
number, press 3
704
To change the message waiting lamp [704]
status, press 1
To change the device status, press 2
To assign the telephone or pager
numbers, press 3
705
706
To change the no answer greeting,
press 1
[705], [696], [694]
[705], [696], [694], [697]
To change the owner’s name, press 3 [709], [708], [706], [836]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698], [691]
707
708
To change the password, press 1
To change the password, press 2
[707], [716]
[715], [708], [710], [717]
[709], [708], [706], [836]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698], [691]
709
To change the personal greeting,
press 1
[709], [708], [706], [836]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698], [691]
710
711
To change the recipient’s name,
press 3
[715], [708], [710], [717]
To change the selection menu, press [699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
7
[702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
712
713
To change the setting, press 1
[712], [663], [820]
[713]
To change the specified prompt,
press 1
To change all prompts, press 2
714
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
[699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
[702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
715
716
To change the telephone number,
press 1
[715], [708], [710], [717]
To change the time and date, press 2 [707], [716]
[682], [716]
717
To change the time and date, press 4 [715], [708], [710], [717]
344
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
718
To change the voice label, press 5
[699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
[702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
719
720
721
To change this question, press 1
[719], [841], [842], [774]
To change to the next person, press 2 [679], [720], [849]
To change user prompt 1, press 1
To change user prompt 2, press 2
[721]
722
To change, press 1
[722], [663]
[591], [722], [432]
[592], [722], [432]
[722], [663], [737]
[722], [663], [759]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
[722], [673]
[722], [663], [808]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
[ 53], [722], [432]
[ 52], [722], [663]
[722], [843]
[722], [843], [850]
[722], [843], [851]
723
724
To change, press 2
[672], [723], [737], [821]
To check the mailbox distribution,
press 3
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [746]
725
726
To check the mailbox distribution,
press 4
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
To clear all mailbox usage counts,
press 2
[844], [726]
[727], [432]
727
728
To continue holding, press 1
To customise your mailbox, press 3 [845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [746]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [832], [746]
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
729
To delete all caller ID numbers, press [729], [432]
1
730
731
To delete all group members, press 1 [730], [432]
To delete distribution verification of
this message, press 1
[731]
To cancel message delivery, press 2
Installation Manual
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[690], [666], [732], [818]
732
To delete group members, press 3
To delete members, press 2
To delete the password, press 1
To delete, press 1
733
734
735
[671], [733], [820]
[734], [780]
[735], [795]
[735], [792]
[735], [780]
736
737
To delete, press 2
To delete, press 3
[672], [736], [820]
[672], [736], [820], [664]
[722], [663], [737]
[672], [723], [737], [821]
738
739
To deliver a broadcast message,
press 1
[738], [739]
To deliver a message, press 2
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [746]
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
[738], [739]
740
741
742
To deliver now, press only the hash [171], [740], [232]
sign
To deliver now, press only the pound [172], [741], [232]
sign
To enable call blocking, press 1
To enable call screening, press 2
To enable intercom paging, press 3
To enable pager access, press 4
To disable all transfer service, press 5
[742]
743
To end recording, hang up
[743]
To cancel your message, press , if
you have a touchtone phone
744
745
To end recording, hang up or press 1 [744], [789]
for more features
To end recording, press 1
[745], [789]
[745]
[572], [745], [789]
346
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[804], [812], [746]
746
To end this call, press
[804], [812], [822], [760], [746]
[807], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [746]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [746]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [833], [746]
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
747
748
749
To end, press 2
[669], [747]
[667], [747]
To enter a new name or mailbox,
press
[662], [238], [805], [748]
[749]
To enter another extension, press
750
751
To enter another extension, press 2 [781], [750]
To enter by name, press the hash
sign and 1
[463], [751]
[463], [751], [678]
[463], [751], [226]
[175], [751]
[150], [751]
752
To enter by name, press the pound [463], [752]
sign and 1
[463], [752], [678]
[462], [752]
[462], [752], [226]
[175], [752]
[150], [752]
753
754
To enter your callback number, press [753], [432]
1
[819], [663], [755], [674], [754]
To erase and exit, press
[819], [661], [755], [754]
755
756
To erase and try again, press 3
[819], [663], [755], [674], [754]
[819], [661], [755], [754]
[819], [663], [755]
To erase this message, press 3
[804], [793], [756], [813], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [793], [756], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
Installation Manual
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
757
To erase this prompt and use system [801], [757], [850]
prompt, press 2
[801], [757], [851]
758
759
760
To erase this question, press 1
To erase, press 3
[758], [841], [842], [774]
[722], [663], [759]
To fast forward, press 6
[804], [812], [822], [760], [746]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
761
762
763
764
To forward all calls, press 1
To forward busy calls, press 2
[761], [762], [764], [763], [765], [681]
[761], [762], [764], [763], [681]
[761], [762], [764], [763], [765], [681]
[761], [762], [764], [763], [681]
To forward busy or no answer calls, [761], [762], [764], [763], [765], [681]
press 4
[761], [762], [764], [763], [681]
To forward no answer calls, press 3 [761], [762], [764], [763], [765], [681]
[761], [762], [764], [763], [681]
765
766
To forward to a CO line, press 5
[761], [762], [764], [763], [765], [681]
To forward to the other number, press [766]
3
767
768
769
To forward to your telephone number [767]
1, press 1
To forward to your telephone number [768]
2, press 2
To generate memory usage report,
[769]
press 1
To clear memory usage counts, press
2
770
771
To generate fax call report, press 1
To clear fax call counts, press 2
[770]
[771]
To generate mailbox usage report,
press 1
To clear mailbox usage counts, press
2
772
To generate port usage report, press [772]
1
To clear port usage counts, press 2
348
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
773
To generate system service report,
press 1
[773]
or memory usage report
management, press 2
or port usage report management,
press 3
or mailbox usage report
management, press 4
To generate mailbox parameter
report, press 5
To generate call account report,
press 6
To generate class of service
parameter report, press 7
To generate fax call report, press 8
774
775
To go directly to a question, press 4 [695], [841], [842], [774]
[719], [841], [842], [774]
[758], [841], [842], [774]
[841], [842], [774]
To hold this call, press 2
[293], [798], [775]
[293], [798], [775], [301]
776
777
To initialise internal modem, press 6 [837], [827], [834], [692], [689], [776]
To insert a pager display command, [722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
press 8
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
778
To insert a pause, press 5
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
779
To insert a wait for dial tone, press 7 [722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
780
781
To keep, press 2
[735], [780]
[734], [780]
To leave a message, press 1
[781]
[781], [750]
782
783
To let the caller select prompt
language, press 4
[853], [854], [855], [782], [665]
To make this message private, press [783], [432]
1
Installation Manual
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
784
To message scan, press 8
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
785
786
To modify message, press 5
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [746]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [833], [746]
To modify the user prompt, press 6
[699], [700], [702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
[702], [701], [718], [786], [711], [714]
787
788
789
To notify the person by pager, press 4 [787]
To page your person, press 3 [788]
To pause and restart recording, press [745], [789]
2
[744], [789]
[789]
[572], [745], [789]
790
791
To play the entire message, press 3 [810], [793], [790]
To play the message, press 1
To check the previous message,
press 1 twice
[791]
To check the next message, press 2
792
793
To play the next caller ID number,
press 2
[735], [792]
To play the next message, press 2
[804], [793], [756], [813], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[810], [793], [790]
[804], [793], [756], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
[811], [793]
[793]
794
To play the next schedule, press 2
To play the next, press 2
[815], [794], [806], [796]
[794], [806], [796]
795
796
[735], [795]
To play the previous schedule, press [815], [794], [806], [796]
4
[794], [806], [796]
797
To reach the covering extension,
press 2
[797]
350
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[293], [798], [775]
798
To receive the message, press 1
[293], [798], [775], [301]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [236], [746]
[798], [739], [724], [224], [234], [746]
[798], [739], [728], [725], [223], [236], [746]
799
800
To record a message for external
delivery, press 1
To check external delivery message
status, press 2
[799]
[800]
To set up mailing list, press 3
To record a message, press 1
To add new mailbox number, press 2
To review the mailing list, press 3
801
802
To record a new prompt, press 1
[801], [757], [850]
[801], [757], [851]
To record the question, press 1
To set the answer length, press 2
To erase the question, press 3
[802]
803
804
To record, press 1
To erase, press 2
[803]
To repeat this message, press 1
[804], [812], [746]
[804], [812], [822], [760], [746]
[804], [793], [756], [813], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [793], [756], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
805
806
To repeat this name, press 3
[662], [238], [805], [748]
To repeat this schedule, press 3
[815], [794], [806], [796]
[794], [806], [796]
807
To repeat, press 1
[807], [746]
[807], [432]
808
809
To repeat, press 3
[722], [663], [808]
[809]
To replay the previous message
information, press 1
To play the next message’s
information, press 2
To play the message, press 3
810
To replay the previous message,
press 1
[810], [793], [790]
Installation Manual
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
811
To replay the previous message,
press 1 twice
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
[811], [793]
[811]
812
813
To reply, press 2
To reply, press 4
[804], [812], [746]
[804], [812], [822], [760], [746]
[804], [793], [756], [813], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
814
815
816
817
To report all mailbox usage, press 2 [844], [814]
To reschedule, press 1
[815], [794], [806], [796]
To retrieve the call, press 2
To review the mailing list, press 4
[816]
[848], [670], [817]
[848], [847], [670], [817]
818
819
To review this group, press 4
To review, press 1
[690], [666], [732], [818]
[819], [663], [755], [674], [754]
[819], [661], [755], [754]
[819], [663], [755]
820
To review, press 3
[671], [733], [820]
[712], [663], [820]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [779], [777]
[672], [736], [820]
[672], [736], [820], [664]
821
822
To review, press 4
To rewind, press 5
[672], [723], [737], [821]
[804], [812], [822], [760], [746]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
352
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
823
To select caller select mode, press 1 [823]
To select without message mode,
press 2
To select before message recording
mode, press 3
To select after message recording
mode, press 4
To disable all entry modes, press 5
To accept, press 6
824
825
To send to 1 recipient, press 1
To send by mailing list, press 2
[824]
[825]
To set Automatic mode, press 1
To set Manual Day mode, press 2
To set Manual Night mode, press 3
To set Manual Lunch mode, press 4
To set Manual Break mode, press 5
To set PBX Control mode, press 6
826
827
To set call transfer status, press 1
To set up covering extension, press 2
To set message reception mode,
press 3
To set incomplete handling status,
press 4
[826]
To set class of service, press 2
[837], [827], [834]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689], [776]
828
829
830
To set delivery time or make this
message private, press 1
[828], [663]
To set delivery time, press 1
For immediate delivery, press 2
[829]
To set dial mode, press 6
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779]
[722], [663], [820], [668], [778], [830], [779], [777]
831
To set leaving a message status,
press 1
[831]
To set covering extension transfer
status, press 2
To set intercom paging status, press
3
To set pager access status, press 4
To set operator transfer status, press
5
To set returning to top menu
automated attendant service status,
press 6
832
To set station call forwarding, press 4 [832]
Installation Manual
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
833
To set station call forwarding, press 6 [845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [833], [746]
834
To set the clock, press 3
[837], [827], [834]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689], [776]
835
836
To set the clock, press 4
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [746]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [833], [746]
To set the group distribution lists,
press 4
[709], [708], [706], [836]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698]
[709], [708], [706], [836], [698], [691]
837
838
To set up mailbox, press 1
[837], [827], [834]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689]
[837], [827], [834], [692], [689], [776]
To set up message waiting
notification, press 2
[838]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [746]
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [832], [746]
839
840
841
To skip setting the password, press [138], [839]
the hash sign
[176], [839]
To skip setting the password, press [138], [840]
the pound sign
[177], [840]
To skip to the next question, press 2 [695], [841], [842], [774]
[719], [841], [842], [774]
[758], [841], [842], [774]
[841], [842], [774]
842
843
To skip to the previous question,
press 3
[695], [841], [842], [774]
[719], [841], [842], [774]
[758], [841], [842], [774]
[841], [842], [774]
To skip, press 2
[722], [843]
[722], [843], [850]
[722], [843], [851]
844
845
To specify the mailbox range, press 1 [844], [814]
[844], [726]
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox [845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [746]
messages, press 1
[845], [838], [728], [835], [785], [833], [746]
354
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
846
To transfer this message, press 7
[804], [793], [756], [813], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [813], [822], [760], [846],
[784]
[804], [793], [756], [846], [232]
[804], [811], [793], [756], [822], [760], [846], [784]
847
848
To transfer with comment, press 2
To transfer, press 1
[848], [847], [670], [817]
[848], [670], [817]
[848], [847], [670], [817]
849
850
851
852
[679], [720], [849]
[556], [849]
To try again, press
To turn off the prompt, press 3
[801], [757], [850]
[722], [843], [850]
To turn on the prompt, press 3
[801], [757], [851]
[722], [843], [851]
To schedule, press 1
To use continuously, press 2
To not use, press 3
[852]
853
854
855
To use the system prompt, press 1
To use user 1 prompt, press 2
To use user 2 prompt, press 3
TONE DIALLING MODE
[853], [854], [855], [664]
[853], [854], [855], [782], [665]
[853], [854], [855], [664]
[853], [854], [855], [782], [665]
[853], [854], [855], [664]
[853], [854], [855], [782], [665]
856
857
[856]
Total message time available per
mailbox is (time)
[857], [374]
858
Total message time available per
mailbox is unlimited
[858]
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
Transferred (number)
Transferred 1 time
Trunk group number is (number)
TUESDAY
[859], [660]
[860]
[861]
[862]
TWELFTH
[863]
TWELVE
[864]
TWELVE [HOUR]
TWELVE [MINUTE]
[865]
[866]
Installation Manual
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
867
TWENTY
[867]
[868]
[869]
[870]
[871]
[872]
[873]
[874]
[875]
[876]
[877]
[878]
[879]
[880]
[881]
[882]
[883]
[884]
[885]
[886]
[887]
[888]
[889]
[890]
[891]
[892]
[893]
[894]
[895]
[896]
[897]
[898]
[899]
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
TWENTY [HOUR]
TWENTY [MINUTE]
TWENTY EIGHT
TWENTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
TWENTY EIGHTH
TWENTY FIFTH
TWENTY FIRST
TWENTY FIVE
TWENTY FIVE [MINUTE]
TWENTY FOUR
TWENTY FOUR [HOUR]
TWENTY FOUR [MINUTE]
TWENTY FOURTH
TWENTY NINE
TWENTY NINE [MINUTE]
TWENTY NINTH
TWENTY ONE
TWENTY ONE [HOUR]
TWENTY ONE [MINUTE]
TWENTY SECOND
TWENTY SEVEN
TWENTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
TWENTY SEVENTH
TWENTY SIX
TWENTY SIX [MINUTE]
TWENTY SIXTH
TWENTY THIRD
TWENTY THREE
TWENTY THREE [HOUR]
TWENTY THREE [MINUTE]
TWENTY TWO
TWENTY TWO [HOUR]
356
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
900
901
902
903
904
905
TWENTY TWO [MINUTE]
TWENTIETH
[900]
[901]
TWO
[902]
TWO [HOUR]
[903]
TWO THOUSAND
[904]
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
[604], [905]
906
907
908
909
Use call waiting on busy signal
disabled
[906]
[907]
Use call waiting on busy signal
enabled
Use the hash sign key as a wild card [157], [908]
character
Use the pound sign key as a wild card [157], [909]
character
910
911
912
913
914
Verification deleted
was erased
[910]
[181], [911], [ 26]
[346], [912], [ 19]
[913]
was sent on (date)
WEDNESDAY
Welcome to the general delivery
mailbox
[914]
915
Welcome to the Voice Processing
System
[275], [915]
[273], [915]
[274], [915]
[915]
916
When you are finished hang up, stay [461], [918], [ 99], [916]
on the line to confirm or change your
number
917
918
You can add up to (number)
[917], [377]
[917], [376]
You can enter up to (number)
[151], [918], [ 99]
[461], [918], [ 99]
[461], [918], [ 99], [916]
[139], [918], [ 99]
[168], [918], [ 99]
919
You can not add any more digits
[919]
Installation Manual
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
920
You have (number)
[920], [382]
[920], [372]
[920], [188]
921
922
923
924
925
926
You have a call
[921]
[922]
[923]
[924]
[925]
[926]
You have a call from (name)
You have 1 FAX message
You have 1 message
You have 1 new message
Your extension is call forwarded all
calls to extension (extension)
927
928
Your extension is call forwarded busy [927]
calls to extension (extension)
Your extension is call forwarded busy [928]
or no answer calls to extension
(extension)
929
930
Your extension is call forwarded no [929]
answer calls to extension (extension)
Your extension is call forwarded to
telephone number (telephone
number)
[930]
931
ZERO
[931]
[Linked Prompts List]
Subscriber Service
Table D-5
[920]
[380]
You have (number)
new message
[604]
[905]
There were (number of failure)
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
Receive Message
Table D-6
[359]
Message recorded by (mailbox number) [367]
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[ 15]
[ 14]
[360]
and transferred via (mailbox number)
and (mailbox number)
[ 14]
and (mailbox number)
Message recorded on (date)
[920]
You have (number)
358
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-6
[ 19]
at (time)
[372]
Messages
Message Scan
Table D-7
[346]
[912]
[ 19]
Message from (name)
was sent on (date)
at (time)
Message Delivery
Table D-8
[654]
[ 19]
This message will be delivered on (day)
at (time)
Personal Group Distribution List
Table D-9
[917]
[377]
You can add up to (number)
more members
Check Mailbox Distribution
Table D-10
[345]
[483]
[ 19]
Message for (name)
[365]
[ 19]
Message sent on (date)
at (time)
received on (date)
at (time)
[220]
[283]
for (mailbox number)
[220]
for (mailbox number)
has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[284]
has not been received
External Message Delivery
Table D-11
[182]
External delivery message scheduled for [652]
(name)
This message is from (name)
[420]
[19]
on (date)
at (time)
[418]
[181]
of (company name)
External delivery message for (name)
was erased
[185]
External delivery message will be sent to [911]
(name)
Installation Manual
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-11
[500]
[366]
[ 33]
right away
[26]
because message retention time expired
I’ll redial (number)
Message to (name)
being delivered now
[297]
[379]
more times
Message Waiting Notification
Table D-12
[461]
[918]
[ 99]
Please enter your callback number
You can enter up to (number)
digits
[461]
[918]
[ 99]
Please enter your callback number
You can enter up to (number)
digits
[916]
When you are finished hang up, stay on
the line to confirm or change your
number
[635]
[271]
This call is for (name)
from (name)
Interview Mailbox Management
Table D-13
[ 16]
Answer length is (number)
seconds
[507]
Fax Management
Table D-14
[920]
[188]
You have (number)
FAX messages
[859]
[660]
Transferred (number)
times
360
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
Alternate Extension Group
Transfers the call coming into the extensions in this group following the sequence
specified by "Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence".
Auto Configuration
(Available with DPT Integration only.) The VPS can automatically draw information
from the KX-TD500, the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232 or the KX-TD612. This
information includes, among other things, extension number assignments for each
VPS port. This saves time in the initial setup. Auto Configuration can be executed
by Rotary switch settings or by System Administration (Quick Setup).
Auto Forwarding
Allows unretrieved messages to be copied or moved to another mailbox.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant feature of the VPS requests the caller to enter an
extension number and then the VPS dials the number. If there is no answer or the
line is busy, the caller is given some options, including the option to leave a
message in a mailbox. This is the advantage of calling an extension indirectly
through the Automated Attendant rather than calling it directly.
Call Blocking
Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the
subscriber’s extension.
Call Screening
Allows subscribers to screen calls. The VPS prompts the caller with the message
Record your name at the tone, and records the caller’s name; it then puts the caller
on hold while playing the name to the subscriber who decides whether to take the
call or not.
Call Transfer
Transfers a call to the requested destination.
Called Party ID
(Sometimes referred to as Follow–On ID) The PBX sends the VPS digits to identify
the forwarding extension, this directs the caller directly to that extention's mailbox.
Installation Manual
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caller ID Call Routing
(Available with DPT Integration only.) The VPS automatically sends calls from pre–
assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension, mailbox (including System
Group Distribution List) or Custom Service.
Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal)
(Available with DPT Integration only.) The VPS announces pre-recorded Caller ID
caller’s names when: (1) extension users listen to messages from pre-assigned
numbers left in the their mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls from pre-assigned
numbers to the users (Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the users by
intercom (Intercom Paging).
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller
name announcements, the VPS will use the personal caller name.
Company Greeting
Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet callers. One (or System
Greeting or none) can be selected for each Day, Night, Lunch, Break, and Holiday
service on a port basis and trunk (outside line) basis.
Company Name
This is played by the VPS to the intended receiver of an External Delivery Message
when she does not enter the password (if required) correctly. This helps her to
realise where the call came from.
Covering Extension
This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service. This can also be
accessed by pressing [0] while a Personal Greeting is being played, or while a
caller is leaving a message.
Custom Service Setting
Allows one-touch access to extensions, other custom service menus, fax machine,
mailboxes, etc. A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal
directions to the non-subscribers.
Default Setting
A parameter defined for the system at the factory which can be changed through
system programming by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
362
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Ringing
There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications:
(1) The VPS is used as the no-answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature
of your PBX.
(2) DIL 1:N (outside [CO] line to several extensions) terminates on telephones and
VPS ports. To give the telephone users a chance to answer calls, the VPS lines
should be programmed for delayed ringing. Otherwise, the VPS will answer the
calls immediately.
Delete Message Confirmation
The VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before erasing a message
left in the mailbox.
Delivery Time
The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a pre-recorded
message. You can specify delivery time in External Delivery Message or when
delivering a message to other subscribers (Subscriber's Guide Section 3.1)
Department Dialling
A speed-dialling feature that permits an outside caller to dial a single digit (1-9) to
reach a specific extension.
Direct Mailbox Access
(Available with DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can enter her mailbox directly
when she calls the VPS from her extension. She does not have to enter any special
codes except for her password, if one is set.
DPT Integration
Digital integration between the VPS and the KX-TD500, the KX-TD816, the KX-
TD1232 or the KX-T612. Requires upgraded software in the PBX.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you
may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration.
For more information, consult your dealer.
DTMF
(Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Commonly referred to as touchtone.
External Call Forwarding
(Available on the KX-TD500, the KX-TD816, and the KX-TD1232)
Forwards calls to an extension that has call forwarding activated to an outside
phone.
Installation Manual
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Delivery Message
A message intended for automatic delivery to outside parties and/or extensions.
The message can be delivered immediately or at a specified time.
External Message Delivery List
Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to outside parties. Each
list can have 8 destinations.
External Message Delivery Redial
Allows the System Administrator to instruct the VPS when making external
message deliveries how many attempts to make when the line is busy or when
there is no answer.
Fast Forward
Puts the user 4 s ahead in the current message.
Follow-On ID
See Called Party ID.
General Delivery Mailbox
When the caller does not dial anything (either because she does not want to or she
is using a rotary telephone), the VPS sends her to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Periodically (daily is best), the Message Manager should transfer the contents of
the General Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations.
Hash Sign
The [#] key on the telephone keypad.
HELP
One of the utility commands that is used to list all utility commands with a brief
description of each.
Immediate Reply
Allows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the
extension number or the mailbox number of the sender.
Inband Signalling
The Follow-On ID (or Called Party ID) that integrates the VPS and the PBX. Uses
DTMF to light message waiting lights. Does not give "high end" features such as:
Intercom Paging, Direct Mailbox Access, Live Call Screening, etc.
364
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Incomplete Call Handling Service
Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy.
There are 6 options for the Incomplete Call Handling Service:
(1) to record a message from the caller,
(2) transfer the caller to a covering extension,
(3) page the mailbox owner via the PBX,
(4) notify the mailbox owner via beeper (pager),
(5) transfer the caller to the operator, or
(6) let the caller try another extension.
Integration
Required between the VPS and the PBX. See Inband Signalling and DPT
Integration.
Intercept Routing No Answer
Transfers an unanswered call to another extension, or to the VPS. (This is a PBX
feature.)
Intercom Paging
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Allows up to 16 different paging groups. An
outside party can reach a subscriber who is away from her telephone using either
internal or external page groups. For a Caller ID caller, if her name has been
recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature, the name will be announced
at the end of the page.
Interview Service
A special type of subscriber mailbox that enables the subscriber to record up to 10
questions. After the answers are recorded, the Message Waiting Lamp turns on at
the subscriber’s telephone. (Good for claims departments, order desks, job
applications, etc.)
Keypad
All touchtone keys on the telephone.
LCD
Liquid crystal display
Live Call Screening
(Available with DPT Integration only.) The proprietary telephone works like an
answering machine. The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone
or the handset while the message is being recorded.
Installation Manual
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOAD
One of the utility commands that is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from
a personal computer.
Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)
An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox. This feature is used
by subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone.
Mailbox Capacity (messages)
The number of messages that can be recorded in a subscriber’s mailbox: should
be set between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System
Manager.
Mailbox Capacity (recording time)
The total length of time for messages in a subscriber’s mailbox: should be set
between 5 and 100 min or unlimited length by the System Administrator or the
System Manager.
Mailbox Extension
Normally the same number as the telephone extension number.
Mailbox Management
Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes.
Menu
A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or
the keys from a personal computer.
Message Manager
(Mailbox 98, 998, 9998, or 99998) The person who takes care of the General
Delivery Mailbox and records: the Company Greetings, Company Name,
Department Dialling Menu, Custom Service Menus, Voice Labels, User Prompts
(User 1/User 2), Multilingual Selection Menu, and System Caller Names.
Message Retention Time
New Message Retention Time —the length of time the VPS will store a new
(unplayed) message before deleting the message.
Saved Message Retention Time —the length of time the VPS will store an old
(played) message before deleting the message.
Message Retrieval Order
The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages: Last In First Out (LIFO) or
First In First Out (FIFO).
366
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Transfer
Allows a subscriber to re-route a message to another mailbox unless the message
was marked "private". Additional comments can be added to this message.
Message Waiting Lamp
Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox.
Message Waiting Notification
The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have
received messages (if authorised by the System Administrator or the System
Manager). There are 3 notification methods: (1) by the Message Waiting Lamp, (2)
by a telephone, or (3) by a beeper (pager).
Multilingual Selection Menu
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this menu. Allows callers to
choose the language they want (System, User 1 or User 2 prompts) when they call
the VPS.
Non-Subscriber
A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox.
Notification Method
(See Message Waiting Notification.)
Operator
Up to 3 destinations can be assigned as operators. This is the extension that
receives calls when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials [0].
Owner’s Name
After a subscriber records her name, the VPS announces her name during
transfers, Intercom Paging, and confirmation of Dialling by Name.
Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator.
This allows callers to dial parties by name (Dialling by Name) rather than by
number. For example, a caller can dial "S-M-I-T" (Smith) rather than Smith’s
mailbox number, which can be hard to remember.
Password
A combination of numbers selected by the subscriber to protect access to her
mailbox. If forgotten, the System Administrator or System Manager can clear it so
that the subscriber can select a new password.
Installation Manual
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Personal Greetings
A subscriber can record messages to greet callers. There are 3 kinds of Personal
Greetings:
(1) No Answer Greeting
(2) Busy Signal Greeting
(3) After Hours Greeting
Personal Greeting for Caller ID
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal
greeting messages for calls from pre-assigned Caller ID numbers. Each greeting
supports up to 8 Caller ID numbers.
Personal Group Distribution List
A subscriber can maintain up to 4 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of
20 mailboxes. Using this list, she can send the same message to all members of a
specific distribution list at once.
Port
The point of connection between the PBX and the VPS.
Private Message
A message recorded as a private message cannot be forwarded. You can specify
privacy when delivering a message to other subscribers (Subscriber's Guide
Section 3.1).
Prompt
Pre-recorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non-subscribers through
specific VPS functions. The VPS supports 3 prompts: (1) System prompts
(prerecorded by the factory in English), (2) User 1 prompts (recordable by the
Message Manager*), and (3) User 2 prompts (prerecorded by the factory in
Spanish*).
Prompts are numbered; the Message Manager can turn off and on the prompts
individually.
*: re-recordable
368
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(Available with the KX-TD500 only.) A subscriber and the Message Manager can
program her extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a
desired extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings
available:
(1) Forward All Calls
(2) Forward Busy Calls
(3) Forward No Answer Calls
(4) Forward Busy or No Answer Calls
(5) Forward to a CO Line
(6) Forward Cancel.
See Remote Call Forward to CO.
Remote Call Forward to CO
(Available with the KX-TD500 only.) Allows the System Administrator to program
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 as the destination to which the
callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside (CO)
line. This feature must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be
utilised. See Remote Call Forwarding Set.
Review
Plays back a message.
Rewind
Replays the previous 4 seconds of a message.
Rotary Telephone
A telephone capable of pulse dial only. Callers using a rotary telephone will be
automatically forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox.
SAVE
One of the utility commands that is used to save VPS data to a personal computer.
Scanning Messages
Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message. Another method
is to press [2] while listening to a message; this instructs the VPS to skip to the next
message.
Service Mode
The System Administrator or the System Manager can change the call handling
method programmed for each Time Group 1-8.
Station Programming
Programming via the proprietary telephone.
Installation Manual
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subscriber
A person who has been assigned a mailbox.
System Administration
System programming can be performed in 2 ways: (1) Locally (personal computer
connected directly to the RS-232C port of the VPS), or (2) remotely (personal
computer connected via the telephone network and the external modem of the
VPS).
Note: Local programming and remote programming are mutually exclusive.
System Administrator
Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager, who use a telephone to
perform their duties, the System Administrator uses a personal computer to
program the VPS. The System Administrator’s handbook is the Installation Manual.
System External Message Delivery Duration Time
The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the
VPS, specified by the System Administrator.
System Group Distribution List
The VPS can maintain up to 20 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20
mailboxes. Each list is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and
is assigned via system administration. A recording into a System Group Distribution
List number will go into the mailboxes of all group members.
System Manager
(Mailbox 99, 999, 9999, or 99999) The person who can perform very basic and
limited system programming using a telephone. She can create/delete mailboxes,
clear subscriber passwords when they are forgotten, set Class of Service
parameters, set the System Clock, and generate System Reports.
System Report
The System Administrator or System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to
monitor the VPS operating status as required.
TIME
One of the utility commands that is used to confirm or set the time and date of the
VPS.
Time Group
A time frame in which Day, Night, Lunch, or Break time period can be programmed.
It is possible to assign up to 8 different Time Groups.
370
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time Synchronisation
(Available with the KX-TD500 only.) When the PBX sets a new date and time or
when DPT Integration is established, the data is sent from the PBX to the VPS.
Two-Way Recording (TWR)
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation
into her mailbox.
Two-Way Transfer (TWT)
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation
into another person’s mailbox.
Unlimited Message Length
Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way conversations of unlimited length into
her or another person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The
maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Voice Mail
A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to
another.
Voice Prompt
Recorded VPS instructions to callers. These are either system prompts or user
prompts.
VPS
Voice Processing System (e.g., Panasonic KX-TVP200).
Installation Manual
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SE-
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-
A
CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX
B
C
D
Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Mes-
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Inter-Digit Timeout
COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP
374
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
E
Error and Warning Indications During System Operation
INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS: KX-TVP102
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-
F
K
KX-TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
Tool 91
KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRA-
KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 Programming for Inband Inte-
KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 Programming for Inband Inte-
G
L
LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SER-
H
Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Pro-
Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station
Installation Manual
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assign-
M
P
N
Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name An-
O
376
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
R
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER
S
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
T
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to
Installation Manual
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
TWR (Two-Way Recording) Button Assignment via Sta-
TWT (Two-Way Transfer) Button Assignment via Station
U
V
Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Pro-
378
Installation Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Manual
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). You may print out this
manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual
in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME.
c
2001 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Japan
PSQX1276XA KK0202YK0 (E)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|